E PR INIC3 ErilT101\

1 ELECTRONIC
ELECTRONICSPA

XPEIIIIVIE
rm
TE
HOW TO BUILD
SCIENCE FAIR BONUS!
Stereo Balance Meter
ctronic Thermometer doe Lire 'Bouncing 'Mil
G.Jitar"Fuzz"Adaipter ANALOG COMPIP 7
OicaI VoiGelransceiver
'-rd-Activated Photoflash
Memory Logic Probe
Electroll tic Restorer
R J ti; -Reiiex Enclosures
olo
Eiectreilic Coin Flipper
Voltagt Monitor
Electronic lipck fee-7;
i' ..j.> , tßä% e,-. -; '), d. rw 4,.,:,,>,,,,,----,eL4migi
TS PI-Mas ee
comPLIE 7011'4 tx-r= .

, .11 e itn
.2. ,L.
I-4 z o
Nu_
sceEmtalcs/PH°T° , _ .,,,, I I-9r e
, 3 y f-- - - 4,

4Yit
1

,,e,
Pt; r

Op Amp C-_,urse
#
PC Board Construction
Usin9 Coax Connectors 44 .
ILI:. -ag-f
.
-

\
9 r
-el tw-

I
;
 IOW! build and test circuits
as Post as you can think!
No soldering or patch cords!

ug în...wîre
tw
6
w
`\ UNIQUE NEW
SNAP/LOCK DESIGN

without soldering
for as little as $ 00
Flexible new Continental Specialties QT SOCKETS® and
BUS STRIPS are a fast, easy breadboarding system with unique
need instantly.
SNAP/LOCK that lets you add or remove as many QTs as you plug in,
Now you can test ICs, transistors resistors, capacitors and more. Just
and connect with solid #22 AWG hook up wire ... no soldering
is needed! No
more shorts! No more burnt fingers! No special patch cords! And you can
use
as $3 for QT
QTs again and again! QTs come in different sizes, starting as low
Sockets and $2 for Bus Strips. Order yours today!
PAT. PENDING

e vlus,Iour Dew coffivietely

`7-.
I
tï
...assembled PHOTO BOARDS...
Ó . Proto Board 14 Pin DIP Size Price
e Model No. Capacity (L" x W") (U.S. only)
101 10 5.8" x 4.5" $29.95
102 12 7.0" X 4.5" $39.95
103 24 9.0" x 6.0" $59.95
104 32 9.5" x 8.0" $79.95

Four new Continental Specialties Proto Boards, made from com-

make all circuit
law
binations of QT Sockets and Bus Strips let you #22 wire, while
and power interconnections with common solid
wiring snap. Aluminum base FREE
power distribution busses make a
Rubber METRIC
plates offer solid work surfaces and perfect ground plane. more
feet prevent scratching. Each Proto Board features one or All are
S- To
way binding posts to tie into system or power supply ground. ENGLISH
linear), TO5s, DIP packs and
compatible with ICs (digital or in
SLIDE
discrete components. Each is assembled and ready -to -use.
-
SIM
RULE
Order today or send for free selection guide, Convert
with applications, photos, specs and more. lengths,
area,
weight, volume

00011100. camoRmem,
Continental Specialties Corp.
325 East St., Box 1942
New Haven, CT 06509
Telephone (203) 624-3103
Instantly,
Yours FREE
with each
Proto Board order)
+j
e
'a+s-----

CANADA: Available thru Len Finkler, Ltd., Downsview, Ontario

CIRCLE NO. 1 ON READER SERVICE CARD

 Handsome woodgrain cabinet,
New square -cornered at no extra cost. (Offered only by NRI)
Sylvania picture tube
6-position detented
UHF channel selector

Modular
construction
with plug-in
circuit boards Automatic
color control

Automatic degaussing
Automatic
tint control

100% solid Automatic line tuning

state chassis
NOW...
learn color TV
servicing while
building this NEW 25'DAGONAL SOLID STATE SET
created by NRI for home training
You'll soon find yourself earning $5
NRI wanted more than a hobby kit TV to $7 an hour, in your spare time...
... so we built one from the circuits even before the course is completed.
up, specifically for teaching advanced Learning at home is easy ... the sim-
plified NRI way. Texts are "bite-size"
electronics. You can only get this and fully -illustrated, leading you step
superb set from NRI ... it's exclusive by step, stage by stage, to a thorough
knowledge of electronics. You can introduce defects into
with NRI Color TV Servicing Course. circuits, perform experiments, and discover the how and
why of circuitry and
NRI was first, to supply home study students with cus-
equipment operation.
tom -designed training kits to give practical hands-on ex-
perience as you learn. Now NRI scores another first ..
with the exclusive 25" diagonal picture tube. solid chas- Train with the
sis, color TV set designed -for -learning. You build it your-
self with N RI's TV-Radio Servicing Course. Leader-NRI.
The same training innovations which have made NRI the
leader in career training at home are now available to
Kit for kit, dollar for you. Mail the insert card for a free full -color catalog
dollar, you get more for which spells out the NRI "discovery" method of learning.
A There's no obligation. NO SALESMAN WILL CALL.
your money from NRI. APPROVED UNDER NEW GI BILL. II you have served since January 31,
in an in service, check GI line on reply card.

4
The TV-Radio Servicing Course
d e e includes a wide -band service type NRI TRAINING
, oscilloscope and a color bar cross- 3939 Wisconsin Avenue, N.W.
hatch generator ...along with Washington, D.C. 20016
other valuable equipment you will use to perform experi-
ments and make repairs on your own and other sets.

1974 Spring Edition 3

 24 ELECTRONIC
EXPERIMENTER'S
hANDBOOK SPRING EDITION

COLOR CODES CHARTS 7

REACTANCE CHART 8
"BOUNCING BALL" ANALOG COMPUTER Terry L. Mayhugh 9
An ideal "Science Fair" project it displays any ball's behavior
when dropped from a height. It does the calculations for a continuous
display which would otherwise take hours of higher -math calculations.
TRANSMITTER FOR THE NEGLECTED BAND Jim White, W5LET 14
"ELECTRIC EYE" IN -OUT ANNUNCIATOR John S. Simonton, Jr. 22
VOLTAGE MONITOR Jeffrey P. Hammes 28
SOUND -ACTIVATED PHOTOFLASH ATTACHMENT Vic Leshkowitz 30
PHOTOCELL MOTOR CONTROL DEMONSTRATOR Bob Koval 32
THE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER Ralph Tenny 35
The versatile linear IC opens up many new areas for the serious
experimenter. This article tells you what it is, how it
works, and covers some practical applicati ons.
BUILD BASS REFLEX ENCLOSURES THE EASY WAY David B. Weems 46
DIFFERENT RESISTANCE DECADE James A. Fred 48
DECIBEL TABLE 51
BUILD A DISTORTIONLESS PREAMPLIFIER James Bongiorno 52
If you are into four-channel-or thinking of making a switch-
this outboard phono preamp can salvage your present
hi-fi set up and save it from premature obsolescence.
IMPROVED FOUR-WAY FLASHER Donald R. Hicke 58
TUNER FOR THE NEGLECTED BAND Jim White, W5LET 59
CONSTRUCTING PC BOARDS Robert A. Sullivan & Robert S. Brodsky 62
SIGNAL DIFFERENCE STEREO BALANCE METER J. R. Laughlin 66
ZENER DIODE SUBSTITUTION BOX Stanley Sula 72

ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK: Published semi-annually by Ziff -Davis Publishing Company

at One Park Avenue, New York, New York 10016. William Ziff, President- Hershel B. Sarbin, Senior Vice President
Secretary, and Treasurer; Philip Sine, Senior Vice President.
Copyright © 1974 by ZIFF-DAVIS PUBLISHING COMPANY. All rights reserved.

4 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

ONE SECOND METRONOME TIMER A A. Mangieri 74
LOW-COST LOGIC PROBE WITH MEMORY H. H. Ross & T. R. Mueller 77
This inexpensive, easy -to -build probe reveals TTL or DTL
logic states as well as low -duty -cycle pulses a handy addition
to your test bench when troubleshooting digital circuits.
HEADS 'N' TAILS Don Lancaster 81
CRYSTAL -CONTROLLED MUSICAL INSTRUMENT TUNER Hank Olson 84
WHAT DO YOU KNOW ABOUT CAPACITORS? Robert P. Balin 90
THE TOUCH -A -TONE Charles D. Rakes 91
QUIZ ON AC CIRCUIT THEORY Robert P. Balin 98
CARE AND HANDLING OF COAXIAL CONNECTORS William I. Orr, W6SAI 99
TWO-TONE "WAVERLY" ALARM Don Lancaster 102
THE OPTICOM Forrest M. Mims, Ill & Henry E. Roberts 107
Ensure the privacy of your communications with this invisible -

light -beam transmitter/receiver which carries for 1500 feet.

BUILD AN IMPEDANCE METER Charles D. Rakes 114
TACH-DWELL METER Norman J. Olsen 118
SURF SYNTHESIZER John S. Simonton, Jr. 119
ELECTRONIC CLINICAL THERMOMETER J R. Laughlin 123
BUILD A DIGI-VIEWER Don Lancaster 127
BUILD THE TIME OUT John Stayton 132
BUILD THE OPTIMUM FUZZ ADAPTER Craig Anderton 136
BUILD A CRYPTO-LOCK James G. Busse 142
SLOW TURN-ON PROTECTS POWER SUPPLY Frank Tooker 146
BUILD AN ELECTROLYTIC RESTORER George J. Plamondon 147
You can laugh at parts shortages if you have electrolytics in
your junk box with this restorer you can salvage most of them.
BUILD AN AUDIO LEVEL METER Samuel C. Milbourne 152
ADD COMPRESSION AMP TO YOUR ELECTRONIC ORGAN J E. Rohen 153
STOPPING ENGINE RUN-ON Karl G. & Richard K. Johnsson 154
SQUAWK BOX TOY FOR $3 Bennett A. Loftsgaard 155
Cocci Photo: Conrad Studio,
F.n details on how to build th,
"Bouncing Ball" analog computer.
.rr pa..,,. 9.

EDGAR W. HOPPER, Publisher

ARTHUR !)irrcior STANLEY NEUFELD. .lsnor. Pub/i /,er
P. SALSBERG. Editorial
P. B. HOEFER, Managing Editor EDWARD I. BUXBAUM, .lrt Director
JOSEPH E. HALLORAN, ;Idr,. Direr/or JOIIN J. CORTON 4(17'. ,Sale.%
ANDRE DUZANT, Terlrtririii llhrshnlor MADELEINE LITTMAN, .ldz,..Serpice -1/gr.
FURMAN H. HEBB, Group l'ire Preilrlerrl. f/aectroni,.c ¿ PJrologrnl)lrlr

1974 Spring Edition 5

 Our terminal service kits, designed to your
specifications, are indispensable for field
service of data terminals and telecom-
g.'° ELECTRONIC
munication units. For information, call ËXPERIMENTER'S
or write.
ASK FOR OUR FREE CATALOG ! HANDBOOK
SPRING EDITION

Ziff -Davis Publishing Company

William Ziff
President
W. Bradford Briggs
Executive Vice President
Hershel B. Sarbin
Senior Vice President
Secretary and Treasurer
Philip Sine
Senior Vice President
Phillip T. Heffernan
Vice President, Marketing
Frank Pomerantz
Vice President, Creative Services
Arthur W. Butzow
Vice President, Production
Edward D. Muhlfeld
Vice President, Aviation Division
Irwin Robinson
TECHNI TOOL, NC.
5 Apollo Rd., Plymouth Meeting, Pa. 19462 825.4990
Vice President, Travel Division
George Morrissey
Vice President
CIRCLE NO. 13 ON READER SERVICE CARD Sydney H. Rogers
Vice President
Now...the most enjoyable, Sidney Holtz
Vice President
do-it-yourself project Lawrence Sporn
Vice President, Circulation
of your life-a Schober Jerry Schneider
Administrative Dir., Ziff -Davis Annuals
Electronic Organ!
You'll never reap greater
reward, more fun and proud
accomplishment, more Ziff -Davis Publishing Company
benefit for the whole family Editorial, Circulation, and Executive Offices
One Park Avenue, New York, New York 10016
than by assembling your own 212 725-3500
Schober Electronic Organ.
Midwestern Office
You need no knowledge of electronics, woodwork or The Pettis Group
music. Schober's complete kits and crystal-clear instruc- 4761 W. Touhy Ave., Lincolnwood, III. 60644
-
tions show you whoever you are, whatever your skill (or 312 679-1100
lack of it) - how to turn the hundreds of quality parts into Gerald E. Wolfe, George B. Mannion
one of the world's most beautiful, most musical organs, Western Office
worth up to twice the cost of the kit. 9025 Wilshire Blvd., Beverly Hills, Calif. 90211
213 273-8050, BR 2-1161
Five superb models, with kit prices from $500 to around Western Adv. Manager, Bud Dean
$2,000, each an authentic musical instrument actually
superior to most you see in stores. Japan
James Yagi, Oji Palace Aoyama
Get the full story FREE by mailing the coupon TODAY 6-25, Minami Aoyama. 6-Chome, Minato-ku
for the big Schober color catalog, with all the fascinat- Tokyo 407-1930/6821
ing details!
eFf
The.9904.4 Organ Corp., Dept. EH -8 MPA
West 61st Street, New York, N. Y. 10023
43
Please send me Schober Organ Catalog. sy/NG COO

E Enclosed please find $1.00 for 12 -inch L.P. 1974 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK is
record of Schober Organ music. published semi-annually by the Ziff -Davis Publishing
Company, One Park Avenue, New York, N.Y. 10016.
NAME Also publishers of Stereo Review, Popular Electron-
ADDRESS ics, Communications Handbook, Tape Recording &
Buying Guide and Stereo Directory & Buying Guide
CITY STATE ZIP
CIRCLE NO. 12 ON READER SERVICE CARD 6 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 COLOR CODE CHARTS
RESISTOR CODES (RESISTANCE GIVEN IN OHMS) BODY -END -DOT SYSTEM
COLOR BAND SYSTEM
1st Significant
1st Signifiant COLOR DIGIT MI'LTIPi.II:R TOLERANCE 2nd Figures
2nd Figures BLACK .20%
Multiplier BROWN to .1%
RED .2%
Tolerance .3%
ORANGE 1000
YELLOW' 10000 GMV Multiplier
GREEN 100000 .5%) EIA Alternale) Tolerance
HLUE 1000000
VIOLET 7 /0000000 .12 1. 2% BODY- END BAND SYSTEM

Resistors With Black Body Color Are

GRAY
WHITE 9
.011 E1.0 Alternate)
.1 ,E1.\ Alternate/ .10'% I EIA Alternate)
.30% - lst1cant g

.5% 1JAN ana EIA Prererreln 2nd Figures

Composition, Non- Insulated. GOLD 1 i2.5% and EIA Preferred)
SILVER 01 (JAN and RIA fiefs, red, .10%1.1.5% ana EIA Treferred)
Resistors With Colored Bodies Are .20%
NO COLOR
Composition, Insulated.
Wire-Wound Resistors Have The 1st
GMV guaranteed minimum value, or -0 . 100%tole an
.3. 6. 12 2. and 3e% are ASA 40. 20, 10. and 5 step tolerances.
1
\ --- Multiplier
Digit Color Band Double Width. Tolerance

CERAMIC CAPACITOR CODES (CAPACITY GIVEN IN pF) HIGH CAPACITY TUBULAR CERAMIC
DISC CERAMICS 15 -DOT SYSTEM(
COLOR DIGIT MULTI- TOLERANCE TEMPERATURE EXTENDED RANGE INSULATED OR NON -INSULATED
nt igur s Pi.IER 10 pie 00 COEFFICIENT FEMP. COEFF. Ist15ignificant
End Figures or LESS IOMMI PPM,°C SIGNI- MULTI- 2n Figures
Multiplier FICANT PLIER Multiplier
FIGURE Tolerance
BLACK 0 1 .2.01'1' .20'1 OINPO) 0.11 -1
DROWN 10 .0.1 Ol' .l% -33(0033) -10 Voltage
Tolerance 1

1.0 -100
RED 2 100 .2% -75100751
1.5 -1000 (Optional)
Temperature ORANGE 3 1000 12.50 -150(N1501
YELLOW 10000 -220102201 2.2 -10000
Coefficient 4
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATING
GREEN 5 0.5 or' .5'1 -3301143301 3.3 1
DISC CERAMICS 13 -DOT SYSTEM) III TE G -470(N1701 4.7 10 TUBULAR CERAMICS
VIOLET 7 -75010750) 7.5 100 1911 Signilicant
lst Significant GRAY B 01 .0.251'' 301P030). 1090 em2nd)) Figures
End Figures chIITE 0 .1 .1.01.E .10% General Multiplier
Purpose 10000
Tolerance
SILVER Repass 6
Multiplier Co apl'ne
GOLD nInn Ii lOn.
IAN, Temperature
V'oba ,Coition!nanl r vu11s for s0m e Coefficient
nwuufs Iua1. 1.111 11100 mlis for other n mpnnies.
T.L. TUBULAR
ENTENDED RANGE
MOLDED -INSULATED AXIAL LEAD TYPOGRAPHICALLY MARKED CERAMICS JAN TOLERANCE CERAMICS
CERAMICS LETTER IOi,I' OVER Ist]Signilicant
I st Significant or LESS IOi'l' 2nd Figures
2nd Figures C ,E.21'' Multiplier
Temperature Coefficient D .íi,5 P'
Multiplier o Tolerance
F .I 0 .1%
Tolerance Capacity G rt.o P' .2%
.51
101 Temp. Coelf. Multiplier
Temperature Tolerance
Coefficient
M e201
t-- T. C. Significant Figure
MOLDED CERAMICS BUTTON CERAMICS STAND-OFF CERAMICS FEED-THRU CERAM ICS

Using Standard Resistor Color -Code IstlSigniliant 1stiSignificant Ist1Significant

1st Significant 2nd Figures 2nd Figures
2nd Figures
2nd Figures Multiplier Multiplier
Multiplier
i-- Multiplier
Tolerance
,Tolerance Tolerance

White Band Temperature

Temperature
Distinguishes Cap- Viewed From Soldered Surface Coefficient
Coefficient
acitor From Resistor
MOLDED MICA CAPACITOR CODES MOLDED PAPER CAPACITOR CODES
ICapacity Given In pF) (Capacity Given In pF)

COI Oil
HEAVE n
Mt 1. ri- F.
DIGIT PLIER
I
TOI.EIOANCE
20'1
CLASS OR
CHARACT LHISTIC
A
CO! 01I DIGIT
Sri
TOT. ERANCE
20%
MOLDED PAPER TUBULAR

j -
-- lstlSignificant
2nd Figures
l'0 tel ACV d t
BROWN 1 110 R
2'0 11ROWN I In
Multiplier
RED 2 IDO C
RED 100
ORANGE 3 1000 31 D Tolerance
OR ANIrV 1000
YEi.I.W 4 10000 E
YEl l OW' 4 10000
GREEN 51.1:1A1 WONT

-
5
GIJAN) GHEE, l0000n 5'1
BLUE
VIOLET
GRAY
6
7
t ((MIA)
HI 1t
Viol 6T
11100000
ist , Significant
Voltage
WHITE 9 J(0:1.51
Indicates Outer 2nd,6 Figures
5%IAN, WHITE Foil. May Be On
GOLD .1
SILVER .01 100 Go1u 51. Either End. May Add Two Zeros To Sig -
SII VElt tu%
Also Be Indicated By nilicant Voltage Fig-
NO COI Olt 2v1
Class or charactcrist c aenotes specilirations o design involving O factors, Olher Methods Such As ares. One Band Indl-
temperature poefI;rle tu, and production test requirements. Typographical Marking cafes Voltage Ratings
All adral lead mica raparitors have a voltage rating of 300, 500, or 1000 volt, Or Black Stripe. Under 1000 Volts.
ur oldrhever Is greater.
MICA MOLDED FLAT PAPER CAPACITORS MOLDED FLAT PAPER CAPACITORS
CURRENT STANDARD BUTTON SILVER
(COMMERCIAL CODEZ (JAN CODE)
IAN AND EIA CODE ' Silver
White EIA 1st 2nd Significant

/
1 Black (JAN)
1
g ir
1st Significant (When 2nd figures
2nd Figures
2nd Figures APPlicab el Sig Voltage
Fig
2nd (or lIti
3rd for 2ndi J Multiplier 1 Multiplier
` Multiplier Multiplier
Black Or Brown Body Tolerance
Tolerance l
Tolerance Characteristic
Class Or Characteristic Class

1974 Spring Edition 7

 REACTANCE CHART
oe
o
- ,o
.%'

\ Ì:\
Oo
IM
á.\\\i.delliÌ:la.\.Pïii.\\\1 V NZI\a{aiNIMMIZIV \ \e
\\it\::- Voii111\\\i.l11111\
_ O/ \\\. \\Iti
- _i\-=..
- lea\\\{ptifflaill\`\\\
eeeieee,OZ11\\.eiimanee\` \\ai zniniMim \
e.IMIIe\V\\xASi\Q{f\MBI\\\\{3i
\\\. ei eeICIIIIeea.lx\n{i MIMI
eelieewM.Nli\ili eNIZIBee\\`@
138010ac1`1331ffli1,0-11111»1MIMIllinI
\\aigS\Maiti\`Sl9: \'S9ºB! \aia\\`'Sa+ «WNW
1011151111MMIaieII1901113s ,11101,w0110.

\\\IliaànÏaIltig
\\\\\II'ì\\\3ili\``1
\
\111é1;

100k
..1`illli.inllì 111I1II0D111Illì\`'NI9Iì\la
;__::::__r:::._::::::::__:::::::;;__:::::::;;_::::___:_
iletaiaBg,iQaille\eM afflai`.\`ni:nal \SN1i \, \'\nti \\
eee{!ee\Ze\N\aiIMIIIIeeeieNNiei811011111311:M`\\iKrMIZZL`\ZfilìMQi\MInfIZIZI1111reZN
-MivnáNZil! 1MIllai\ i11.-INZe.
»N1if1 161131M1Me\11Cl`1111M 211ac1.1M1LSW1,

`1\11i.1; \1\1113.4\Ìa\IM\\\\Il02\ \eIligh\\\a1

= 111illll\\11illl0Mllll ,`i1il.fll\i1l
\.
l \.wáiiie 111i111!
10k
\\á..ïüñ
\.ANm\eee.ee\v =1'11k22, ü\ñáiwiiii
\e V eeeeallie\V :Z\\i..áitii
A\Nfae\i\«MX, NIMillfneMBNvMMNi, 1ïi:ii 6M110w\ät:
11IIIMMIi11-_MB\\\gN_\Ile\ MC/\-re\
e9,MIeeeMIZI111i.1111110311ZZO\VN.eüSBIeMo.NISiiiieIIILIZIZINgeZeiMe.eCIMIZINIM\\211NiaiaMOeMi\.n
8511.1 1.11\y111N1111313131311\'\\N111`
t\\n!ii\.ole.\`Îimau1ietimmcÌmem\\u1imhm\
`KII\IINI `\MI1igH `\Z11is\\lllig.31\\\\111M`\11.1
LIIiIIIllLIIIIIlï 111illiì\1.110lì\1111li1ì\'a`l
áe.rw\.áiáliÚ \\\\.\V\: \..: ;:::i \\\\.\Úi:\:::wi::in:i::\4.
fflinh\.A\Nelie: e111131b.rN11oe. e eMM\ A.N\\e.eNZIMII\A\N\\e3e111:111111111\ A\NN\eJ1iii0111111\` \\ ae
e19Mee\`diN\`\.liel'\\.N\e1 ViMINIeeCS\\\.lLllIKMew\\.N\e.GIZI:11111Zili.\.NAZeCIfieea1ee\\\.1
uma.ve.momia nso, maa.vsifflo..is..gswi
\\\i
11331111MIMINIuYILWIZIlleerki310k.w1111111WIIM10ks11MIIMMI.011121111111MiNIM110111101B

1.
\id11iN `nllliNI\ErallMM\\II2:k\NI\Dlia:
`e\\ \`\`1
e.á-...a.-
0lilXÚle Aái:-eee
\`1
11®
`
\111111lIIII\1IIII!\
i.á.ïii
w...aoauee..
eZUM\A\MaieJePAIIMI\U\IL\e9
`
WHIN 1111111811
-=:.-:A._::e;:::-----:2o-:es ie
`

111V A.aean
-.:...es.;::c3-.::.:.
\NB Oe. iMOZZV.wwe.un
\\n\eJemim\ \\!
1180113eeZON112\ili11313113eeeMN\\.eiIMIZIeee: `.1\\.li1131:113eeei `\\e.eileeZZIIeeei `NM\.li7eeQ.N
EIBMBi\IaNN1n\ffli ONN,C1\` 1MIMISNt1e\-IIIk: \ \\JI5.\-11111\\àNI1\-131.\\ \
.a
rMMMlarMIIce..LNALIs.Vao1a eeggORMieM,4101 011.
\aDmoI\i®Il211 \\\11e \\3110.4 \1111im.\isen 00k,,
M1111111® 311I1111Z811o11R\`1i1111\\11i1111\Mél
;w
1053
ó.i.mii.:ïaáái~.äóïi:iara
atii
miii:\i.áïa:i.:.áïm:ïmomm.c.,\i.m
ot
eemweetaCeiiiieeeieBMNIONC.eieeeNee\ZON\\.lillIMOIee\\te.eill._1316
.ffleegifflell111»Il1xace11aaMICRWKWIwIZIMeffl113c93111MeiusommikNe
\egi:agaffl: \\ane.i; m'ogii; \'Si.`+i+rm
\\111BM.a\IIlM\MI11iz'a`\\IlM `\2Ile `LVJ1 ok,s
u9! \
\MMBAIMILNINN\NeIIMMI\.eaNIaee1 MOIM\VNNeAe7effli111\\Aw1iroi/13111\sNNeeJeae/M\\NN

\\ `\\e. eìe31LIZIee\ `.ti

I51

.In \ \, 1. .\: \
=Z.IZZ:;Z;Z:.::a_.:r
eeee...\.aaaa.u.w_
eae\.
í\Z:il\a:
-1i1I11Ìi.,`'L31§0111i\l1gllii\l1E
- iiï..iNiiï\.iáiiii\
111I11Ìi\%i1Illli -
eelrr
- --
ee\\.ó i:CiI
-

\\ \i
1\M\A1NN1G1131111811 811111\\à\N4CI\- 11811\\\NN1iI\r

=;;óNaZ:ii
1.
è:S7
\1\11a,:\i111c4.\\\11111Il.a,tI\a\Ien; m\eN11c.,1 \\,1
----
`MNN\eiei\\\ieee.IMI\.A\Nu\eeieaMe\.A\N\aeaffling\A\NN\\:emeraieA\A.\
`\\\e.ei
ee\91111ee ,01C\91ei A111.11n\N\\qi llIWZIIMIA\N W.f i

9a\
V \e.0 ee\eee\\.N

ái:::iñi7ZIZZiniaä:ü\ini:mimiimom i,MAINiiNie:\.
\\efe101111111111\\\\\N4111\eAi/0e\.\\N linage ammo \\
eieieee.uNe.aeceea\\aeieisaea\10.eieiIIIMMliieN
ammo a.\\
whew

gui \e4Zi! ati \ezq uiffle:gi: iw

\\\11:;.'.l\'\1115::\as11F:;111111;:u\11:'::;\i1
t1'llli\
Ci! e`!ea
0.11111A!M\\NMaP

`IIÌi. ß'IÌì
\asl.
IIMeJeWINeAre\\ \\N
_81111VM11i170111Z,I3NNiC11311101381ZeiSNÚI- meeeme1tammegge\ilk.erkSe

.i
mee
-
IIIkMNIUIIMBIMke.Neaa-man.

.;illii\tió`
\\a
\7
-

.o D.
10Hz IOOHz 1000Hz 10kHz I00kHz 1000kHz,4r
A,
FREQUENCY

8 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 SCIENCE FAIR

BUILD THE

"BOUNCING
BALL"
ANALOG
COMPUTER
Displays any
ball's behavior
when dropped
from height .. .
Saves hours of
higher-math
calculations

BY TERRY L. MAYHUGH

Science Fair project demonstrawc, slide rule. Both provide instantaneous an-
THIS
some principles of kinematics and how an swers on a continuous scale without abso-
analog computer works. lute accuracy. (In contrast, digital corn -
An analog computer may be likened to a (Text continues on page 12)

Front -panel view of the analog computer. The circuit was constructed on Vector
board and mounted in an aluminum tray folded from sheet rock to provide panels.

OAfto IC a"'1k=. S*1E" RAIE 14111A6 1111467 Rtot7Rh`L 6R011

e
T974 Spring Edition 9
 R21 INITIAL R23
IK HEIGHT 68011
+I5
IK21
R22
5K
R31
IOK
OFFSET
-4- 5V +15V
C5
yF
+I5V
C2
2
.IyF
ADJ

R5 R19
5 1 2211 2211
03
iIF .IyF
R3 R17
R2 I0M 2.2M
IOK
GRAVITY

C2 C4
.IyF .IyF

R6 - R18 R20
221E 2.2M 2211

-I5V
R16

DAMPING
10K
O

R15
IOOK

R671
200K
DI R13
20K

R7
IK +15V
MASS RB
I0K
+15V
R69
RIO
2211
2211 R70
R68 10K
5.11(

R14 CIO
[.OIPF
R12
2211
6.8K
L
C19
RII R9 22yF
2211 3.3K -15V

+15V
-I5V
R52
-15V 4.7K 03
R54
3.3K
S2
R46 DROP
5.IK 04

02 R57
R48
R47 I0M I0K
101<
SWEEP
RATE
R56

R49
10M

-I5V
R53
6.8K

D5
R55
IOK

REPETITIVE
R58
5.1K

r
10 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 INPUT SUPPLY PARTS LIST
PROTECTION AND DECOUPLING
+15V
13P10
IN
+15V OUT
RI, R25, R29, R46, R58, R68-5100 ohm, 1/4
W res. ±5%
IN4002 1i R2, R32, R47-10,000 ohm variable panel -
BP30 07 C20
22pF
mounted potentiometer
R3-10 megohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%v
BP2O
R4, R67-200,000 ohm, 1/.1 W res. ±5%
I5V OUT
-15V IN R5, R6, R10, R11, R12, R19, R20, R26, R27,
IN400^cC21 R34, R36, R44, R45, R50, R51, R63, R64,
D8 22yF
R69-22 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
R7-1000 ohm variable panel -mounted po-
tentiometer
D2 R8, R24, R28, R33, R35, R37, R43, R55, R57,
R61, R62, R65, R66, R70-10,000 ohm, 1/4
W res. ±5%
R32 R9, R54-3300 ohm, Y4 W res. ±5%
IK
SPRING R13-20,000 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
RATE R14, R53-6800 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
R33
R15, R30-100,000 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
10K
JI
VERT R16-10,000 ohm potentiometer
C12
OUTPUT R17, R18-2.2 megohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
.01 F R21, R56-1000 ohm, Y4 W res. ±5%
C9
.IyF
R22-5000 ohm variable panel -mounted po-
R43
10K
tentiometer
436
22.0.
- R23-680 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
R.31-10,000 ohm variable PC -mount poten-
D3 04 R42
IN746 IN746 50K tiometer
BALL
SIZE -I5V
R38-15,000 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
R39, R40, R41-16,000 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
R42, R60-50,000 ohm variable PC -mount
potentiometer
+
CII
R48, R49-10 megohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
22pF R52-4700 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%0
R59-47,000 ohm, 1/4 W res. ±5%
R40
I6K (:1, C2, C3, C4, CO, C7, C8, C9, C14, C15,
C17, C18--0.1 µF disc ceramic capacitor
C5, C16, C22-0.1 µF Mylar capacitor
C10, C12, C13-O.O1 µF Mylar capacitor
C11, C19, C20, C21-22 µF tantalum capaci-
R60 tor
50K
BALL SIZE
J2
HORIZ
Dl, D2, D5 -1N914 (or equiv.) silicon diode
OUTPUT D3, D4-1N746
D6, D7. D8 -1N4002 (or equiv.)
C18 ICI, IC4, 1C8-!ntersi! 8007 FET op -amp (or
.19F equiv. such as µA740 or NE536)
IC2, IC.3, IC5, IC6, 1C9-741 op -amp
R65
IOK
R64
2211
IC7-558 op-amp (dual 741)
IC pin numbers shown for TO -5 package
Si, S2-Spst toggle switch
-I5V J1, J2-BNC jack
K1,K2-Relay (Babcock BR12-140B2 or

0
equiv. dpdt with 12 V dc and approx. 100 -
05 ohm coil resistance)
Ql, Q2, Q4, Q5 -2N718 (or equiv. npn with
beta greater than 30)
Q3 -2N3789 (or equiv. pnp with beta greater
than 25)

Complete schematic and parts list for

D6 the "Bouncing Ball" analog computer.
All parts are readily available and
K2 total cost should not exceed $30.00.

1974 Spring Edition 11

 paters are essentially fast arithmetic ma-
PHYSICAL chines that solve one problem at a time
PRINCIPLES INVOLVED with great accuracy.) Analog computers
can simulate a variety of factors by sub-
stituting electrical models. The computer
described in this project, for example, can
he programmed to solve an interesting prob-
lem: Given the initial height of a ball of
known mass above a hard surface, the force
of gravity, the viscosity of the medium, and
the spring constant of the ball, how does
the ball behave when it is dropped?
The computer "paints" a ball on the
screen of an oscilloscope and, when given
When the ball is lifted above the floor. the Drop command, computes and displays
potential energy is said to be stored in it continuously the path of the ball as it falls,
due to the work done against the gravita- compresses at the hard surface, rebounds,
tional field while lifting it. When released in
a uniform gravitational field it falls and the
and finally settles on the floor.
potential energy is converted into kinetic The machine quickly does the calcula-
energy as the downward velocity increases. tions for a continuous display which would
Since the gravitational field is uniform take an engineer days to complete by hand
over the distance concerned and, assuming
zero air resistance, the ball is uniformly
and plot. The operator controls the param-
accelerated (at the rate of 32 ft/sec per sec eters Gravity, Mass, Damping, Spring Con-
on earth). The scope photo shows the effect stant, as well as the horizontal velocity
of the uniformly accelerated motion. Since across the screen. A repetitive mode is also
the sequence of shots represents equal incre-
ments of time (as the scope's blanking was
provided for a repeating display.
strobed at a fixed PRT), the vertical velocity Although analog computers cannot give
of the ball increases as the ball falls toward the 15 -decimal -place accuracy of their dig-
the surface, as expected. Theoretically, the ital cousins, they are better suited for solv-
change in the velocity is the same in each
time interval. The value of Gravity can be ing "real time" problems that would other-
varied to change the acceleration and there- wise require a knowledge of differential cal-
fore the time required to reach the floor. culus. More precise quantitative results than
However, as Gallileo observed, objects with possible with the project's computer would
different masses fall at the same rate; and
this is seen from the fact that varying the require an expensive version of it with con-
mass has no effect on the fall time. trolled offset errors, calibrated potentiom-
Although the acceleration is uniform if the eters, etc. Nonetheless, the unit described
air resistance is zero, in a practical situation gives a fair approximation of what happens
the falling body will eventually attain a con-
stant (terminal) velocity at a certain point with a "bouncing ball."
where the drag offered to the ball becomes
significant. (Drag increases with velocity.) Construction. Construction is relatively
This may be simulated by increasing the simple, as the layout is not critical. How-
Damping which, in effect, increases the vis-
cosity of the air, making it more "syrup -y." ever, feedback elements should be placed
When the ball strikes the surface, a por- near their associated op-amps. The proto-
tion of its kinetic energy is absorbed (dis- type was constructed on a piece of Vector
sipated as heat), leaving the remainder to be
converted back into kinetic energy during the
board and mounted in an aluminum tray
rebound. The Spring Rate determines the folded from sheet stock, with front and rear
amount that is left for rebound. Note, again panels for mounting the control pots, etc.
from the photo, that the velocity decreases All op -amps are of the 741 type with the
as the ball rebounds on any particular
bounce. This, again, is due to the gravita-
exception of those used in the integrators.
tional field acting to decelerate the motion Here FET input amps with their low bias
of the ball. This time the kinetic energy is currents are necessary due to the high val-
changed into potential energy by the gravi- ues of input resistors. Practically any FET
tational field acting against the ball. At the op -amp may be used and a few suggestions
peak of its rebound height, vertical velocity
is zero and the cycle continues. This time are given in the parts list.
the remaining potential energy is converted The entire project was built for less than
into kinetic energy by the gravitational field $30. All components are readily obtainable
and again a percentage is dissipated at the
floor and the rebound gets lower and lower. from local or mail-order electronics parts
houses.
12 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 This optional tone generator sounds off
each time the bouncing ball strikes the
"ground." It consists of basic UJT os-
cillator triggered on by pulses from ICI.
The UJT time constants can be modified
to create any type of "bounce sound."

ICI
PIN 6

How It Works. /C7 is used as a sine/co- Operation. The computer requires ±15
sine generator to generate the circle. The volts and a scope capable of X-Y mode oper-
two quadrature outputs of the oscillator are ation (either a dual -trace scope with X -Y
summed with the vertical and horizontal in- capability or a single -channel do scope with
formation generated by the computer in IC6 access to the horizontal amp) . Due to the
and /C9, respectively. low sweep speeds involved, it's necessary to
IC8 is used as a Miller integrator to gen- d.c.-couple into the horizontal plates to get
erate the horizontal sweep. The rate is de- a repetitive display. Full-scale vertical and
termined by R47 and the initial condition is horizontal scale factors are about 10 V but
set by one set of closed contacts of K2. QI they may be adjusted to anything less by
and Q2 form a comparator to open the ini- using external voltage dividers.
tial -condition contacts of KI and K2 when With power applied, the controls set to
the Drop switch is closed. When the Repeti- their mid -positions, and the Drop switch
tive switch is closed, the relays momentarily "on," R42 and R60 are adjusted to give a
reset the initial conditions when the sweep symmetrical circle of convenient size for the
reaches about 9 volts, and the action re- display. R31 is then adjusted so that the ball
peats. One set of contacts on KI is used to just "sits" on the "floor" with little or no flat-
apply power to K2 to insure that the proper tening. The Repetitive switch is then closed
initial height is reset before the sweep be- and the ball should return to the upper left
gins again in the repetitive mode. corner and automatically drop. The Gravity
The actual computer arithmetic is done and Damping controls may be adjusted to
by ICI through 105 and their associated change the fall as well as the rebound. The
components. IC1 is an integrator whose rate Spring Rate changes the springiness of the
of change of output is determined by the ball, which controls the amount it flattens
setting of the Gravity control (ignoring, for when it hits the floor, as well as its rebound
the moment, the second input from IC2). characteristics. The Sweep Rate can be ad-
IC4 integrates ICI's output with initial con- justed to control the horizontal velocity of
dition set by the Initial Height control. Two the ball, or it can be turned down to zero.
feedback loops are used to control the Damp- Typical results are shown in the scope
ing and Spring Rate of the loop. IC2 divides photo and on the front cover. The pictures
the sum of these two components and di- were taken by strobing the scope's beam
vides them by the Mass to complete the blanking repetitively during one sweep with
path back to IC1. the shutter held open. O
1974 Spring Edition 13
 Transmitter
for the
Neglected Band
NO LICENSE IS REQUIRED
FOR THE 1750 -METER (160-190 kHz) BAND
BY JIM WHITE, W5LET

LONG AGO as 1950, the Federal Com- a dual triode (VI) , with one half used as
As munications Commission issued Part 15 the oscillator and the other half as the r -f
of its Rules-an action we are all familiar amplifier. Crystals for this frequency are
with because it legalized the operation of expensive and hard to find, but the oscilla-
unlicensed walkie-talkies of the 100 -MW tor circuit used here is very stable. Another
class in the 27 -MHz (11 -meter) CB hand. dual triode (V2) is used as the speech am-
The same action also set up a 30 -kHz band plifier with gain control between stages.
between 160 and 190 kHz. This relatively These two stages provide ample gain for a
unknown, unused band can he utilized for ceramic or crystal mike. The speech ampli-
experimental, unlicensed operation provided fier drives V.3, a class A modulator.
certain technical requirements are met. The The power supply is a conventional half-
latter include: transmitter input power must wave rectifier with filter.
be limited to 1 watt; antenna and feedline
length must not exceed 50 feet; emissions Construction. The prototype was assem-
outside the band must be down at least bled in a 7" x 9" x 2" aluminum chassis
20 dB below the unmodulated carrier; and as shown in the photographs. Although the
operation must be on a non-interference layout is not critical, it is suggested that the
basis. There is also the universal rule: no same general approach be used. Note that
profane or illegal language! the transmitter coil L2 -L.3 is on a plug-in
You may wonder what can be done at
these low frequencies with only one watt.
Here, the ground wave is the thing. On a EDITOR'S NOTE
cold winter night, with an efficient antenna,
you can work up to 100 miles. There arc no Although the transmitter described
here does not require a license for oper-
restrictions on the type of emission that ation, strictly speaking it may need a
can be used; so you can experiment with certificate attached to it. The certificate
radioteletype-writer, SSB, FM, conventional may be executed by "a technician skilled
AM, or just plain C\V-as long as you ob- in making and interpreting the measure-
serve the band limits with your modulation ments that are required to assure com-
and make sure that no commercial station pliance" with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
is on the air in your location. The certificate should contain informa-
What do you do all this with? The gear tion on the operating conditions of the
device, the antenna being used, a state-
described here is an easy -to -build, low-cost ment certifying that the device complies
transmitter using only three tubes. (A com- with the FCC Rules as described in this
panion tuner is described on page 59.) The article, and the date of construction.
r -f portion of the transmitter (Fig. 1) uses

14 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 C7
1/2-12AÚ7
VIA

(
J c9
150pF
VIB
I/2 -123Ú7I6

HOPF 7
RFCI

K IOmH L3

RI 8 5
47K
R2 CIO
-rZ
.7".6.11
6
0018F 27K 115- 115-
550pF 550pF
C8
.0473F

*SEE TEXT
C13
002yF
*R14
1
C12
IyF

C2
.015F
V2B V3
I:'_ I; AT 716 6305
C3
.OI9F
R3 5 R7
120K 82K T2

+
R13 4 R6 R8 RIO
IM 1.5K 12K 47011
C4
255F

TI 4

---
9 9
O
--- 5 5

117
VAC R12 RII S2
1011 27011

Fig. 1. The circuit for the low -

CIA CIB frequency transmitter is a con-

405F 405F
ventional combination of an
oscillator, r -f amplifier, au-
dio amplifier, and modulator.
PARTS LIST R4,R8-1200-ohm, " "
Cl-Three-section, 40-µF, 150-volt electro- R5-1-megohm potentiometer
lytic capacitor R6 -1500 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
C2,C3-0.0l-µF- 400 -volt capacitor R7.82,000 -ohm, " "
C4 -25-µF, 25 -volt electrolytic capacitor R9 -470,000 -ohm, " "
C5 -4-µF, 150 -volt electrolytic capacitor R10 -470 -ohm, -watt " l
C6 -0.001-µF, 500 -volt silver mica capacitor R11 -270 -ohm, "
C7-110-pF, 500 -volt mica capacitor R12 -10 -ohm,
C8-0.047-µF, 400 -volt capacitor R13-1-megohm, 1/i -watt "
C9-150-pF, 500 -volt mica capacitor R14-See text
C10,C11-115-550-pF trimmer capacitor S1,S2-Spst slide or toggle switch
C12 -0.1-µF, 400 -volt capacitor TI-Transformer; secondary, 125 V at 50 mA
C13 -0.002-µF, 500 -volt disc capacitor and 6.3 V at 2 A
Dl-Silicon rectifier T2 -8
-henry, 40 mA choke
J 1-.11 icrophone jack V 1-12ÁU7
J2-Coaxial connector (Amphenol 83-1R or V2-12AT7
similar) V3-6AQ5
LI-Miller X -5496-C longwave tapped coil Misc.-7" x 9" x 2" aluminum chassis (Bud
L2-200 turns, #30 enameled wire scramble AC-406 or similar), 7 -prong tube socket,
wound on 11/1" diameter coil form 6 -prong tube socket, 9 -pin tube socket (2),
L3-25 polystyrene coil form 21/4" long x 11/4"
turns, #30 wire, scramble wound on
diant (Mayfair 24-6P or similar), terminal
top of L2
strips, rubber grommets, mounting hard-
R1 -47,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor ware, short length of 52 -ohm coaxial cable,
R2 -27,000 -ohm, " antenna system (50 ft max for transmission
R3 -120,000 -ohm, " " line and antenna combined).

1974 Spring Edition 15

 Ti V3 CI CII
CIO

L2,L3

V!

V2

JI R5 S2 T2 SI LI

The components are easily assembled on a 7" x 9" x 2" aluminum chassis.
Note how the L2 and L3 coils are random wound on the plug-in coil form.

form, so a socket must be used for it. The top of L2. The winding begins at pin 1 and
coaxial antenna connector, J2, is mounted is in the same direction as L2. It ends at
on the rear apron. The oscillator coil, LI, pin 6. Once the windings are complete, coat
is mounted on the front apron, with the the assembly with coil dope to keep the
tuning slug screw available from the front. turns from moving.
The lead from L3 to the coaxial connector
is made from a length of small -diameter Testing. With power switch Si on and
coaxial cable. transmit switch S2 off, note that the filaments
To wind L2 and L3, use the form called of the three tubes glow. With S2 on, check
for in the Parts List and drill four small for high voltage at the tube plates. Take care
holes over the designated pins to pass the when using the voltmeter-one hand holding
wire through the form. The plate coil, wound the probe handle, the other off the chassis!
first, starts at pin 5 of the form and consists The best way to set the operating fre-
of 200 turns of #30 enameled wire, quency is by using a frequency meter, re-
scramble -wound on the form. If you try to membering to include the sidebands and
wind the coil neatly, you will soon run out making sure that the entire signal is between
of form, so scramble the windings to occupy 160 and 190 kHz. If you don't have a fre-
about 1" of the form. Terminate L2 at pin quency meter, you can use an ordinary
2. Be sure to scrape the insulation off the broadcast band radio. Select an operating
wires before trying to solder them to the frequency-say 185 kHz, which will have
pins on the coil form. harmonics at 370, 555, 740, 925 kHz, etc.
Coupling coil L3 is composed of 25 turns Choose a local station whose known fre-
of #30 enameled wire scramble -wound on quency or its harmonic is the same as the
16 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
harmonic of your transmitter and adjust Ll voltage is higher than 120, install R14
until the two beat against each other. To get bypassed by C12 to reduce the voltage to
enough signal injection, you may have to 120. Resistor R14 is determined (experi-
run the transmitter antenna lead close to mentally) by how much you have to lower
the BCB radio antenna. Once the operating the voltage.
frequency has been located, the adjustment
screw of LI can be secured with a drop of Antenna. When you have only one watt
rubber cement or a jam nut. of output power, the antenna becomes of
You can use a field strength meter to paramount importance. A length of wire
adjust CIO and Cll for maximum output, tossed out the window will not work. For
or you can connect a milliammeter between best results, a vertical antenna should he
T2 and L2 (for the moment, ignore R14 used, with the total length of both trans-
and C12 and tune C/O -C// for a dip in mission line and antenna not more than
plate current as the tuned circuit passes 50 feet. A good ground, preferably a series
through resonance. With the antenna dis- of long buried radials, must be used.
connected, this dip should be about 2 mA; There are many all -wave receivers capa-
and with an antenna connected, the current ble of tuning to the 160- to 190 -kHz band. If
will be about 8 to 9 mA with C/O -C/1 ad- you have one of these, you can use it in
justed for minimum current. conjunction with the transmitter to form
To keep the operation legal, the power a complete station. If you don't have one,
input to the final must be one watt or less. you will be interested in the receiver which
Measure the voltage at pin 5 of L2. If it is is described on page 00-a fixed -tuned
120 volts, then you can run 8.3 mA final superhet tuner designed specifically to be
current (120 x 0.0083 - 1 \vatt). If the used with this transmitter. 4
View of bottom of chassis shows how connections are made point-to-point
with a liberal use of multi -lug terminal strips to support the components.

1974 Spring Edition 17

DIGITAL COLO
Bell&Howell Schools
introduces an amazing
new color TV featuring
channel numbers and
digital clock that
flash on the screen
and automatic
channel selector!
You build and keep
Now you can build and keep this revolutionary new Bell & Howell
25" diagonal digital color TV!
a color television that's ahead
Mail the postage -free card today
of its time!
for complete details, free!
You've seen TV's that swivel, TV's
with radios built in, TV's small enough
to stuff in a suitcase and TV's that
have remote control.
But now comes a color television
i E
And, to insure highest quality per- struments you can use professionally
formance, this new TV has all -elec- after you finish the program.
with features you've never seen before.
Features now possible as a result of the tronic tuning, reliable integrated cir- A new digital multitneter that mea-
new technology of digital electronics cuitry, and 100`4 solid-state chassis for sures voltage, current and resistance
... features that make Bell & Howell's a brighter, sharper picture with long and displays its findings in big, clear
new 25 -inch diagonal digital color TV life and dependability. numbers. Far more accurate and read-
ahead of its time! Like... able than conventional "needle pointer"
meters that require guesswork and
Channel numbers that flash big and interpretation.
clear right on the screen. An on-screen
digital clock that flashes the time in
hours, minutes and seconds with just
the push of a button. An automatic
channel selector that you pre-set to
skip over "dead" channels and go di-
I.63 0 0
rectly to the channels of your choice. miff
The solid-state "triered sweep
oscilloscope is a "must" for accurate
analysis of digital circuitry. With it you
are able to make measurements of
circuits in much the same way that
5 Perform fascinating heartbeats are measured on an electro-
cardiograph. Includes DC wide -band
2:39:03 experiments...test your new TV
as you build it ...with the
vertical amplifier and "triggered sweep"
feature to lock in signals for easier
exclusive Electro -Lab,' observation.
electronics training system. The design console is a valuable de-
It's yours to build and keep! vice for setting up and examining cir-
Designed exclusively for our stu- cuits without soldering! Features
dents, this new Bell & Howell Electro- patented modular connectors, AC
Lab features the most sophisticated power supply and transistorized dual
and up-to-date "tools of the trade". In- range DC power supply.

18 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

RTV I S HERE!
Build it
yourself... so electronics is
the perfect way i° %
changing
to learn all
about the
exciting new
- y,
0
%d
>0
/ . our lives!
There's a lot more to digital elec-
tronics than lust the numbers! True,
that s what you see on more and more
products like digital calculators, clocks
and watches. But behind the numbers
field of digital

r;&:
lies a fantastic new technology that's
creating higher standards of accuracy
electronics! \1 9
of

e. gs
It's a fascinating spare-time
project you can enjoy at home!
Imagine spending your spare time
4111.66.0. !A
o and spectacular products like this new
Bell & Howell digital color TV!

actually building your own 25 -inch

diagonal digital color TV! Ifs a project
you can enjoy working on right in your
home. And you'll be amazed at the You don't have to be an sessions" held in major cities through-
electronics knowledge you'll pick up electronics expert to build it ... out the year where you can enjoy
we help you every step of the way. "talking shop" with instructors and
in a relatively short period of time! fellow students.
There's no travelling to classes, no One of the beauties of this TV is
lectures to attend, and you don't have that you don't need previous elec- Pick up valuable skills in digital
to give up your job or paycheck just tronics experience to build it! With a electronics that could lead to extra
because you want to get ahead. When few simple household tools, our step- income full or part time ... or a
you finish this new Bell & Howell by-step instructions and the exclusive business of your own!
Schools program, you'll have the skills Electro -Lab', you've got all the basics
you need plus a great color TV to you need. Should you ever hit a 'snag', Once you have your new TV, cash
keep and enjoy for years! you're just a toll -free call away from in on all that you learned from building
one of our expert instructors who can it! This new Bell & Howell program
help you solve it. You can also take employing digital electronics will help
advantage of our in -person "help you gain valuable new skills that could
easily lead to extra income, part time.
A service or repair business of your
own? Why not! We even show you how
to get started with a complete volume
on the basics of setting up a TV servic-
ing business. Get the complete story on
this exciting, learn-at-home pro-
gram ... the world's first color
TV course employing digital
electronics technology!
Mail card today
for full details, free!
ESct:m-1 ab i. a ,00.oeral trademark
of the Hell & 11o..rll Com on>.

If card has been removed, write:

An Eleclronics Home Study School
OrVfIV InSTITOTE OF TECFIOOLOGV

BELL E HOWELL SCHOOLS

1974 Spring Edition 21

 BUILD THE

"ELECTRIC EYE"
IN -OUT
ANNUNCIATOR
SOPHISTICATED CIRCUIT REVEALS WHETHER

PERSON ENTERS OR LEAVES PASSAGEWAY

BY JOHN S. SIMONTON, JR.

T HE ELECTRIC "EYE" has been a faith- know simply that someone or something has
ful, reliable workhorse in all sorts of bur- interrupted the beam of light, the Annunci-
glar alarms and counting systems since be- ator tells you whether the person was enter-
fore the word "electronics" was coined. Even ing or leaving the passage -way covered.
today, it is extensively used in these applica- Uses of the Annunciator include monitor-
tions. But too often it is used in circuits that ing one -way -only garage doors, operating
are far from up-to-date. automatic doorbells or chimes that do not
The "In -Out Annunciator" described here sound when a visitor is leaving, guarding
is, in fact, an electric eye system-using a high -security areas, and discriminating sizes
highly sophisticated circuit. Designed for of objects. It also makes an interesting, at-
the special case where it is not enough to tention -getting Science Fair project.
22 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Two inexpensive resistor-transistor logic low. Since both inputs to G3 are now low, the
IC's are at the heart of the Annunciator, con- output of this gate goes to high and is then
taining enough electronics to provide the inverted by G5. The output of G3 is also ap-
amplification needed for good sensitivity in plied to one of the inputs of G4 to guarantee
high ambient light areas and the logic neces- that this gate's output will remain low.
sary to distinguish between objects passing Gate G7 now has one of its inputs at low
in either of two directions. and the input from G2 at high; so, its output
is still low. When LDR2 is darkened, the out-
Theory of Circuit Design. Before going put of G2 goes to low, applying a second in-
into a detailed examination of the Operation put to G7 and causing the output of G7 to
of the Annunciator's circuit, it is useful to go to high. As a result, Ql conducts and ener-
point out that gate pairs GI/G3 and G2/G4 gizes Kl. The state of G4 does not change be-
in ICl, as shown in Fig. 1, are wired with re- cause the output of this gate is held low by
generative feedback through resistors RI and the high output of G3.
R2, respectively. This feedback arrangement As the light again illuminates LDRI, the
adds hysteresis to the response of the circuit state of the circuit does not change by virtue
so that slight changes in ambient light level of feedback from G7 which holds the output
will not be misunderstood by the circuit and of GI at low. When the light fully illuminates
generate "false" counts. Capacitors C3 LDR2, the output of G2 goes to high and,
through C6, by rolling off the high -frequency consequently, the output of G7 goes to low,
response of ICl, reduce the sensitivity of the unlocking the loop formed by GI, G3, and G5.
circuit to transients. Also, G3 and G4 are Objects passing between the light source
cross-coupled to form a set -reset latch. and the system so that LDR2 is darkened
The steady-state outputs of the NOR gates first, followed by the darkening of LDR1, gen-
with both LDRI and LDR2 fully illuminated erate a similar chain of events to energize K2.
are: Cl and G2, high; G3 and G4, low; G5
and G6, high; and G7 and G8, low. Construction. Since integrated circuits are
Now, suppose the light source is interrupt- used in the Annunciator, printed circuit
ed first on LDRI and then on LDR2. By board construction is the only realiste ap-
darkening LDRI, its internal resistance in- proach to assembly. You can 'etch and drill
creases and causes a high input to be present- your own circuit board by carefully following
ed to Gl. In turn, the output of G1 goes to the actual size etching guide provided in Fig.
Text continued on page 26

LORI
LIGHT
SHIELD

All components except power transformer, on/off switch, and LDR's mount on printed
circuit board. Spacers and 4.40 machine hardware fasten circuit board to case top.
1974 Spring Edition
 Fig. 1. Two quad two -input gate digital IC's supply all functions for proper bidirection-
al operation of Annunciator system. Relays control counters and; or signaling devices.

l°1

-UV
HH

24 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 PARTS LIST R5,R6-50,000-ohm trimmer potentiometer
C1,C2-100-µF, 15 -volt electroli ti capacitor RECT1-50 PIV, 1 -ampere rectifier bridge

C3 -C6-0.1-µF disc capacitor assembly (Motorola MDA942A-1 or similar)

IC1,1C2-Integrated circuit (Motorola MC - SI-Spst switch
724P) T1 -12.6 -volt, 300 -mA filament transformer
K1,K2-12-volt, 1640 -ohm relay (Sigma No. Misc.-Printed circuit board, terminal strip.}
65F1A-l2Dc or similar) (2), line cord and strain relief ; 1/4" -long
LDRI,LDR2-Light-dependent resistor spacers; 61/.1" X 3%" X 2" plastic or
(Clairex No. CL703L or similar) Bakelite box; 5 -dram pill containers (2):
Q1,Q2-2N2712 transistor hook-up wire; 4-40 hardware; solder; etc.
Note: The following item can be obtained
R 1,R2 -68.000 -ohm from PAIA Electronics, Inc., P.O. Box
R3,R4-2200-ohm ( All resistor, 1/. watt, 14359, Oklahoma City, OK 73114; etched
R7 -470 -ohm Jr 10% tolerance and drilled circuit board No. 5701pc for
R8,R9-680-ohm $3.50 postpaid.

Fig. 2. At top is actual size etching and drilling guide for fabricating printed -circuit board.
In component location and orientation guide (above) note particularly orientations of IC's.

1974 Spring Edition 25

 KI K2 SI R5 R6

Access to contacts on K1 and K2 is through solder lugs mounted on small phe-

nolic boards which are on relay frames facing toward on, off switch S1 in photo.

2, or you can purchase a ready -to -use board strips which serve as tie points for the leads
from the source given in the Parts List. of the LDR's. )
Begin assembly by mounting the compo- Position the light shields (5 -dram pill con-
nents on the board (see Fig. 2) . Be careful to tainers) at opposite ends of the transformer,
properly orient polarized components, and and use a pencil or scoring tool to mark their
use heat from a 35 -watt soldering iron spar- outlines on the Bakelite case. Then remove
ingly. Also, as you solder, take pains to avoid and set aside the shields. Locate the centers
solder bridges between closely spaced foil of the light shield outlines and slowly and
conductors-particularly around the IC carefully drill a 1,46" hole, following it up
solder pads. with a i4" bit to enlarge the holes. At this
Mount KI and K2 on the circuit board with point, you can use a multiple -drilling tech-
4-40 machine hardware. Then use insulated nique, a nibbling tool, or a chassis punch to
jumper wires to connect the relay coils to the enlarge the holes or cutouts so that they are
appropriate solder points on the foil pattern slightly larger in diameter than the shields.
of the circuit board. The mounting holes for power switch Si
When mounting trimmer pots R5 and R6, and the circuit board, and the access holes for
bend their leads to position the adjustment the slots of R5 and R6 trimmer pots can now
slot directly over the ;4"-diameter holes in the be accurately located and drilled. Position
circuit board. This allows the system to be the circuit board as close as possible to the
adjusted through access holes in the plastic front of the case to obviate any possibility of
cabinet once final assembly is complete. the lugs on Si from contacting T1.
A standard 634" X 31" X 2" Bakelite case When all front-panel holes are drilled, paint
makes for an exceptionally compact project. and label the panel as desired. Allow suffici-
However, steps must be taken to keep com- ent time for the paint to dry; then drill a hole
ponents and assemblies from interfering with for and mount the line cord-via its strain re-
each other. The following general assembly lief-and the terminal block on the rear of
sequence should be followed as closely as the case.
possible. Drill two #60 holes, about 30° apart and
Begin mechanical assembly by drilling the as close as possible to the bottom of each
mounting holes for transformer T1. Locate pill container. Then use flat black paint to
the transformer so that it is in contact with coat the interior surfaces of both containers.
one of the long sides of the case. (Note that When the paint dries, use a pin to clear the
the same machine hardware used to fasten #60 holes of paint. Insert the leads of the
T1 in place is also used to anchor the terminal LDR's through the holes, daub a drop of
26 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 epoxy cement on the undersides of the (K2 remains energized); illuminate LDR1
LDR's, and press the LDR's to the bottoms of (KI and K2 open) While the system is oper-
.

the containers. ating properly, it should be impossible for

Slip the light shield assemblies into their both relays to energize simultaneously.
respective cutouts, taking care not to tear off Although the system employs two LDR
the LDR leads. Run a thin bead of epoxy sensors, it is not necessary, in most cases, to
cement around the lip of each shield; then use two light sources. A single light source
seat the shields squarely in their cutoffs and and a flashlight reflector can be used to illum-
allow the cement to set at least overnight. inate both LDR's satisfactorily if the dis-
Interconnect all components and assem- tances are reasonable. Of course, if the dis-
blies as shown. Then mount the circuit board tance between light source and Annunciator
inside the case with 4-40 machine hardware is excessive, a two-light source system would
and "-long spacers.
3
be required.
When you get ready to set up your system,
Setup and Use. Rotate R5 and R6 fully orient it so that the maximum amount of am-
clockwise (viewed from the component side bient light reaches the LDR sensors. Avoid
of the board) Point the LDR's at a relatively
.
pointing the LDR's toward windows or
bright light source, plug the power cord into bright room lighting, and do not set up the
a convenient ac outlet, and close Sl. Use a system so that an opening door will trigger it.
piece of opaque cardboard to completely Finally, when counting people passing by, it
cover LDR1; neither relay should be ener- is a good idea to locate light sources and sen-
gized. With LDR1 still covered, place an- sors about 54" from the floor so that swinging
other piece of cardboard over LDR2; now arms will not produce multiple counts.
KI should immediately be energized. Now, turn on the system and orient the set-
Alternately exposing and covering LDR2 up for maximum illumination of the LDR's.
should cause K1 to open and close. Leaving If necessary, you can use mirrors to bend the
LDR2 covered, illuminate LDR1; KI should light beam around corners so that more than
remain energized. Removing the cover from one area can be surveyed.
LDR2 should cause KI to deenergize. Adjusting R5 and R6 is simple. Rotate both
The reverse of this procedure to test K2 is controls fully counterclockwise (viewed from
as follows: cover LDR2 (Kl and K2 open) ; the front of the case) . Temporarily mask
cover LDR1 (K2 closes) ; illuminate LDR2 LDR1 from the light source and rotate R6
until Kl pulls in; then back off until K1 just
opens. Interrupt the beam to LDR2 once or
twice with your hand to check that Kl opens
and closes properly.
Remove the mask from LDR1 and place it
in front of LDR2. Rotate R5 until K2 ener-
gizes; then back off until the relay just de -
energizes. The ccmtrols are now set for maxi-
mum sensitivity.
The relay contacts can be used to activate
a variety of alarms or counters. In simple
BELL one-way systems, use the normally open con-
TRANSFORMER
tacts of the appropriate relay to turn on the
system. A slightly more elaborate system,
using both relays and a dual door chime is
shown in the wiring diagram in Fig. 3. People
passing in one direction will cause the chime
dig" to sound once; people passing in the opposite
direction will cause the chime to sound twice.
This same basic arrangement can be used as
a secure area monitor by substituting two
DUAL CHIME counters. Anyone entering the area will be
registered on one counter, while those leaving
Fig. 3. When wiring dual chimes the area will be registered on the other coun-
into system, use only normally open ter. In this way, you can tell if someone has
and common contacts on relays. gone into the area and has not come out.
1974 Spring Edition 27
 WHEN THE VOLTAGE

A LIGHT COMES ON
DROPS `VOLTAGE
BY JEFFREY P. HAMMES `MONITOR
I N SOLID-STATE equipment, the dc sup- voltage drops below a preset level, it will
ply voltage level is often quite critical. turn on an indicator lamp. It can be built
Many times, if the voltage drops below a on a small printed circuit board, all parts
specific level, the circuit does not operate costing about $6. Although the indicator
properly. When a battery supply is used, is designed to keep tabs on a 12 -volt sup-
it is highly desirable to have a means of ply, a variety of voltages may be moni-
checking on the voltage level. tored by changing a few resistors.
Described here is a solid-state, voltage The schematic is shown in Fig. 1. The
drop -out indicator that has in excess of circuit is essentially a five -stage dc am-
110 megohms input resistance so that it plifier using a FET input. When a suffi-
will not load the supply. When the supply ciently high negative voltage is applied

DI
JI HEP156

RI 1R8
22M 10K 118 K

#53®
R2
22M

02 04
R3
22M
BÌ
6-i2V

R4
22M
R12
27K
R5 01
22M HEP801 D RIO HÉP55 R13 R14
2Kj 100K 33K I.BK

R6
IM

R7
(SEE TEXT)

+ó
J2

Fig. 1 PARTS LIST

B1 -6 -to -12 -volt battery R7-See text
Dl-HEP156 diode R8 -10,000 -ohm, -watt resistor
1/2
11-#53 lamp (see text) R9 -22,000 -ohm, resistor
1/2 -watt
.11,12-Five-way binding post (one red, one R10 -100,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
black) R11 -18,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
QI-HEP801 transistor R12 -27,000 -ohm, 1/2-2vatt resistor
Q2,Q4-HEP739 transistor R13 -33,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
Q3.Q5-HEP55 transistor R14 -1800 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
Rl -R5-22-megohm,'/2-watt resistor Misc.-Suitable chassis, lamp socket, hard-
R6-1-megohm, multi -turn potentiometer ware, wire, solder, etc.
(Bourns 3068-P or similar)

28 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 4--.-(-)INPU1

Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern

(left) and component installation
(above) for the voltage monitor.

\&afoI? gJg
j%). Den I c)-0

to the gate of the FET, the transistor has ohm resistors into the divider network.
a very high resistance. In this case the In any case, there should always be some
remainder of the amplifier is cut off and point in the rotation of 116 that causes
the indicator light is off. When the gate the indicator lamp to go out. Once R6 is
voltage drops below a certain level, the preset so that the lamp just goes out, then
FET turns on-as well as the amplifier any time the monitored voltage drops be-
and the indicator light. low the preset level, the indicator will
The switching point (the monitored go on.
voltage level at which the circuit changes Note that the monitoring circuit is iso-
states) is determined by the voltage di- lated from the dc source being monitored.
vider consisting of R1 through R7, with Therefore, when using a metal chassis,
R6 being adjustable to set the voltage pre- do not use the chassis as a common
cisely. Diode D1 is a safety device which ground.
prevents damage to the FET in case the Any type of assembly may be used;
input voltage is accidentally reversed. and if desired, a PC board such as that
The resistance used for R7 depends on shown in Fig. 2 may be used. This illus-
the voltage level to be monitored. With tration also shows the component instal-
R6 set at the center of its rotation, select lation if you make the board. Use care
a value for R7 so that the indicator lamp in installing the semiconductors. The in-
can be turned off with just a small rota- dicator lamp used is determined by the
tion of R6. If you are monitoring a voltage battery. The #53 lamp called for in the
less than 10 volts, one or more of the five Parts List is good for a 12 -volt battery, but
22-megohm resistors may be omitted. For any other low-power indicator lamp may
a relatively high voltage, you may have to be used as long as the rating of Q5 is not
introduce one or more additional 22-meg- exceeded. O
1974 Spring Edition 29
 und-
tivated
otoflash
ttachment
FREEZE HIGH-SPEED MOTION USING THIS SIMPLE CIRCUIT
BY VIC LESHKOWITZ

\VE you ever wondered how "frozen duced by the action to be photographed;
motion" photographs are made? I.ike and this signal is amplified by the high -gant
the one that shows a balloon in the process audio module. Transformer Tl steps up the
of bursting as a needle penetrates the skin? output signal and generates the trigger pulse
They are easily made and you can do it for the SCR. Sensitivity potentiometer R1
yourself if you have a camera with a "bulb" determines the sound level required to trip
or "time" position, an electronic photoflash the SCR and thus determines the moment
(strobe), and the circuit shown below. of firing of the electronic strobe.
Since sound travels at approximately
Theory of Operation. An electronic strobe 1000 ft/s, each foot between the micro-
uses the closing of a switch within the phone and the sound source represents
camera to energize the flashtube circuit. about 1/1000 of a second in time delay.
This occurs automatically when the camera Thus the positioning of the microphone is
shutter release is operated to take a picture. very important if high-speed action is de-
As shown below, an SCR can be used to sired.
simulate the camera switch. When the SCR
is turned off, it has a very high resistance; Construction. The physical size and
when fired, its resistance' is very low. power requirements of the circuit are de-
The microphone senses the sound pro- termined by the audio amplifier module

PARTS LIST
RI Rutery suitable for audio module used J2- -Phono connector
JI lliniuture phone jack RI-I-megohm potentiometer with SI
attached
The SCR simulates camera flash R2 -470,000 -ohm, 1/. -watt resistor
switch and is triggered by the SI --S pst switch on RI
noise picked up by microphone. STROBE
SCRI-Silicon controlled rectifier (2íV.3528.
MIC
J2 HEP62I, or similar)
JI T1-Audio output transformer 4/10,000 ohms
+Vcc SCRI (Stancor A3822 or similar)
2N3528 _flic.-Crystal microphone
Module-Any solid-state module capable of
driving a speaker (Lafayette 19-55103 or
AMPLIFIER
similar)
MODULE Misc.-Electronic flash extension cable
(Kaiser 1421 or similar), battery holder.
phono plug, suitable chassis. multi -lug
terminal strip, mounting hardware, wire.
etc.

30 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 used. Although a low-cost Lafayette module
(19-55103) was used in the prototype, al-
most any transistor or IC audio module
capable of driving a 4- or 8 -ohm speaker will
suffice. These are usually battery powered.
Mount the audio module and battery in a
chassis with the input (Jl) and output (J2)
connectors, the sensitivity control, and the
on-off switch on the front panel. Transformer
Tl is mounted directly on the chassis bot-
tom with a multi -lug terminal strip to hold
the remainder of the components.
Secure an electronic flash extension cable
from a camera supply house and remove
the jack that goes to the camera. Strip the
ends of the two leads and temporarily
solder -tack the two leads to the connections
on a conventional phono plug, which will Strobe (upper left), circuit chassis,
be inserted in J2. and mike are attached as shown here.
With the microphone connected to JI
and the strobe attached to J2, make sure
that the strobe is charged and ready to fire. Allow time for the strobe to recharge,
(The little red light should be on.) Turn position the microphone near the target
on the power to the module and adjust the (but not within the photographed area),
sensitivity control until a sound activates the and focus the camera on the subject. Open
flash. If the flash does not occur, the con- the camera shutter by placing the shutter
nections to J2 may be wrong. Unsolder the mechanism in the time or bulb position. Re-
leads on the 12 phono connector and re- turn the sensitivity control to its prede-
verse them. If the strobe still does not fire, termined position, execute the event, and
check that there is an audio signal across close the camera shutter. That's all there is
R2 with the sensitivity control up and some to it.
sounds in the room. If there is an audio Remember that the microphone -to -noise
signal, then the SCR may be at fault. source distance represents the time delay
between the action and the firing of the
Operation. The sound -triggered flash pic- strobe. This can be adjusted to stop the
tures should be taken in a reasonably dark action at almost any point. O
room. Total darkness is not essential "as you
will probably have to stop the camera down This photo was taken by dropping the
to the point where a little light will not sticks onto drum, triggering flash.
register on the film. Place the shutter speed
dial in the bulb position; and, using the
guide index of the film in conjunction with
the indicator on the strobe, set the lens
opening for the flash -camera to subject dis-
tance. If you are using an SLR, a closeup
lens may he used for a more dramatic effect.
Try to keep the camera and flash about the
same distance from the subject because the
dial on the flash is calibrated for this type
of use.
With power applied to the sound module
and the strobe ready to fire, slowly turn
up the sensitivity control and make a sound
of about the same volume as the event to
be photographed. Adjust the sensitivity
control to fire the flash with this sound.
Make a note of the sensitivity dial setting
and turn the sensitivity down.
1974 Spring Edition 31
PI IOIOCELL
great learning
MOTOR and
teaching aid
CONTROL
DEMONSTRATOR
BY BOB KOVAL

I E MOST EFFECTIVE teaching aids K3 is energized and latched in since its cir-
TI and the most interesting science fair cuit is completed through the contacts of
projects are working models of mechanical, K2. (If the light beam is removed from
electrical, or electromechanical devices. The PC1, relay Kl will drop out.) The entire
photocell motor control demonstrator de- sequence takes place in just a few milli-
scribed here falls into this category. Unlike seconds, so just a quick flash of light on
most such projects, however, it offers audi- PC1 is enough to operate the circuit.
ence participation. Passersby are invited to To turn off the motor, a beam of light
turn on and off a motor themselves simply must be directed at PC2, which generates a
by shining a beam of light on a photocell. voltage that causes Q2 to go into conduc-
By spreading out the circuit on a large tion. Now, K2 is energized, opening its
151'i" X 24" piece of ',í' -thick plywood and normally closed contacts and de -energizing
running the wires on the front surface of K3. When K3 drops out, the motor circuit
the board a twofold objective is achieved. is opened, and the motor stops operating.
First, the project has eye appeal (an impor-
tant consideration at science fair judgings). Construction. Begin by selecting a '.Z' -
Second, since there is no hidden circuitry thick piece of clear plywood measuring
on the rear of the board, it is more conven- 15 a" x 24" (or substitute a close -grained
ient to explain how the system operates. piece of particle board, cut to the same di-
mensions) . If you use plywood, make sure
How It Works. Photocell PC1 (see Fig. the top lamination is birch so that there will
1) is connected across the emitter/base be less of a tendency for the wood to crack
junction of transistor Ql. Then when light after it has been painted. Sand the wood
strikes PC1, a slight voltage is generated to obtain a smooth, flat finish, remove all
which causes Ql to conduct. This, in turn, wood dust, and apply a thin coat of sealer.
causes relay Kl to be energized and power When the sealer has thoroughly dried,
is applied to the motor. Simultaneously, sand and clean once more. Now paint the
32 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 ei
1.5V
MOTOR
I5 82
Fig. 1. Relays, operated by photo-
cell -driven amplifiers, apply and
remove power from the motor.

PARTS LIST li3-50,000-ohm miniature trimmer potenti-

ometer
B1,B2-1.5-volt D cell (see text) 1-24" x 151/4" piece of '/2" birch plywood or
B3-9- or 12-volt power source (see text) close -grained particle board
K1 -K3 -1000 -ohm, 7 -mA spst relay (Sigma 1-3 -volt dc hobby motor
Type 11F-1000-G/SIL) Misc.-6.32 brass machine hardware; crimp -

PC1,PC2-Solar cell (International Rectifier on solder lugs; #14 plastic -jacketed solid
Corp. Sl M, or similar) hook-up wire; sandpaper; sealer; white or
Q1,Q2-2N404, 2N1191, or SK3006 transistor light gray paint; battery connectors (2) for
R1,R2-50,000-ohm, linear taper potentiometer B1; etc.

board with thin coats of white or light gray supporting by soldering their contacts to
enamel, using as many coats as necessary solder lugs (see Fig. 3) and fastening them
to give a hard reflective finish. Remember to the screws. The leads of transistors Q1
to sand and clean between each coat and and Q2 are simply connected to the screws
allow sufficient time to dry. directly or via solder lugs.
Note that the board is painted before the Wiring is best accomplished by cutting
holes are drilled. The reason for this is to the leads to the appropriate sizes and at-
prevent the screws from picking up paint taching to each end a solder lug, after
when they are pushed through the holes. which the leads are simply bolted into place
Using the information provided in Fig. with machine nuts. Use #14 solid, plastic
2, drill 'K" holes for parts mounting on the insulated wire to obtain the neatest layout
board. Drill through from the painted side and so it can be seen for a considerable
so that as the drill point exits from the distance. Remember, the bold appearance
wood, any flaking or chipping will be on the of the wire adds to the success of your
unseen side of the board. (Note that holes project.
for the relays are not dimensioned into the The power source for the transistors con-
drawing since different types of relays re- sists of two 9 -volt batteries in parallel. No
quire different mounting hole centers.) switch is provided, since the battery con-
Pass a 6-32 X 1" brass machine screw nector easily snaps on and off the batteries.
through each hole from the rear of the (When the demonstrator is to he used for
board, and fasten in place with machine long periods, such as at Science Fairs, two
nuts. Next, mount the motor in its appro- heavy-duty 6 -volt lantern batteries can be
priate location by any convenient method, connected in series and hooked up to the
and epoxy cement PC1 and PC2 in place. circuit in place of the 9 -volt batteries. )
The size D flashlight batteries are soldered Mount the 9 -volt batteries as shown, and
to #14 solid wire and connected to the route their wires behind the board. The
appropriate screws with solder lugs, making dashed lines in Fig. 3 show where the bat-
a neat and sufficiently strong arrangement. tery leads terminate in the circuit.
The potentiometers should be made self- No switch is provided in the motor power
1974 Spring Edition 33
 I-5/8"

8-1/4'

15-1/4"
IH 6 3/4"

I"
2" 1/2"
1/2" J

Fig. 2. Holes drilled through demon-

strator board are for machine -hard-
ware mounting screws and terminals.

Fig. 3. Neat, symmetrical layout is

accomplished with aid of heavy -gauge
insulated wire and machine hardware.

supply since the 1) cells supply no power posed, again from about 5' away direct a
when the circuit is in standby. The D cells beam of light onto PC2. Adjust R2 so that
are in a series -parallel configuration to pro- when the beam strikes PC2, K2 is energized.
vide long life. Then, when the beam is moved away from
PC2, K2 should immediately drop out.
Ajustment and Use. After making a com- Uncover both photocells. Now direct the
plete check of your wiring, cover PC1 and flashlight beam onto PC1, and adjust R3
PC2, and set Rl and R3 to their mid -range until K3 pulls in when the light strikes PC1.
positions. Connect the 9- or 12 -volt power Check that K3 remains locked in and is de -
source to the circuit, but do not install B1 energized only when the light beam is di-
and B2 vet. rected at PC2.
Uncover PC1 and from about 5' away, Now install B1 and B2 and recheck the
direct a light beam onto it and adjust R1 operation of the circuit.
so that Kl is energized when the light Potentiometers Rl and R2 are sensitivity
strikes PC1. Move the beam away from controls that can be adjusted for optimum
PC1; KI should be immediately deener- circuit operation under whatever ambient
gized. Listen for the clicks. light conditions exist in the vicinity of the
Now, with PCl covered and PC2 ex- demonstration setup. QQ

34 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 BY RALPH TENNY

The
OperoEîonol
Amplifier
Wat it Is

& -ow it wor<s

THIS VERSATILE LINEAR IC OPENS UP MANY NEW AREAS
FOR THE SERIOUS EXPERIMENTER

THE OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (us- 2. Zero output for zero input.

ually shortened to op amp) is actually 3. Infinite input impedance; no power
nothing more than a dc -coupled amplifier consumed from the driving source.
with extremely high gain and with exter- 4. Zero output impedance; output volt-
nal components connected to it to control age should remain the same even if load
its response characteristics. Although there resistance drops to zero.
was nothing new about the circuit, the 5. Infinite bandwidth; zero rise time.
term operational amplifier gained recog- 6. Insensitivity to either power supply
nition in the early days of electronic com- or temperature variations.
putation when op amps were first used to Although such a perfect amplifier has
perform certain specific mathematical oper- not yet been developed, modern semi-
ations. conductor technology has produced an op
Today's op amp (usually referring to amp whose characteristics come quite close
an integrated circuit device) approaches to the perfect case.
in performance the elusive "perfect am-
plifier" which, if it existed, would have the What's in an Op Amp? A typical op amp
following characteristics: consists of three basic parts as shown in
1. Infinite gain; a very small change Fig. 1: a high-impedance differential am-
in input should produce an infinite change plifier that has low drift and wide band-
in output. width; a high -gain stage; and an output

((
Vex' me
/NOUTS{ .t
`NoN-iNyERT/NG

Fig. 1. The basic arrangement of a typical op amp. Such

a circuit could contain up to couple of dozen transistors
a
and associated resistors, all on a very tiny silicon chip.

1974 Spring Edition 35

 INVERT/N
(EI)-,NPUT
A°
SUMM/NG
UNCT/oNi Ri ©
Ro
ourouTCEo)
/DEAL AMPL/F/ER:
/NPl/rs2
(E2,NON-/NVERT/NG Ao= o0
Eo=O iYiNENE/=E2'O
R%= o0
Ro= O
Fig. 2. A perfect amplifier would have these Z/=I2=0
characteristics. Although still a dream, such BsWDW/OTN = e"r3
a circuit may not be too far in the future.

stage that isolates the gain stage from the positive (non -inverting) input, the output
external load and provides the actual pow- is positive -going and the configuration is
er output. called a follower. Because no feedback is
The conventional symbol for an op used in Fig. 4, the amplifiers are operating
amp, together with the characteristics of "open loop" and a small input produces a
a perfect amplifier are shown in Fig. 2. large output.
Note that both polarities of the supply Actually, operational amplifiers are usu-
voltage are used (with the common ally used with some form of feedback
grounded) This is necessary for the op
.
(closed loop) as shown in Fig. 5. In this
amp to be able to deliver both positive inverter arrangement, feedback resistor R2
and negative (with respect to ground) is connected from the output back to the
signals at the output. inverting input to produce a signal which
The schematic of a basic differential works against the input to reduce its effect.
amplifier is shown in Fig. 3. The currents Resistor RI isolates the inverting input
to the emitter-coupled transistors (QI and from the signal source and represents the
Q2) are supplied by the constant -current circuit's input resistance. The non-inverting
source (Q3) The characteristics of the
.
input is grounded in this case.
differential pair and the associated resistors Assume that a 1 -volt signal is applied
are closely matched in the manufacturing to Rl. Due to the high input impedance
process. If the two input voltages are either tv-
zero or are similar in level and polarity,
the amplifier is balanced because the col-
lector currents are equal. Therefore, a zero
voltage difference exists between the two } our,avrs
collectors. The sum of the emitter currents
is always equal to the current supplied by
the constant-current source so that, if one
transistor draws more current, the other /Weir ! /Weir
must take less. Thus if the input to one
transistor causes it to draw more current,
the current in the other decreases and the
voltage difference between the two col- p3
lectors changes in a differential manner.
The differential swing is greater than the
simple variation that can be obtained from
only one transistor.
To further understand the operation of
the differential amplifier, consider the dia-
4 CONSTANT-CURRENT
Soth CE

grams in Fig. 4. In A, a positive -going v

signal applied to the minus input produces Fig. 3. This basic differential amplifier
a negative -going output. Thus the con- is found in op amps. The biasing of Q3
figuration at A is called an inverter and determines the amount of current flowing
the minus input is called the inverting in- in Q1 and Q2. A differential pair produces
put. If the same signal is applied to the greater output swing than single transistor.

36 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

of the op amp, essentially no current will tide will illustrate a number of practical
flow into the input terminal (also called examples.
the summing junction) , and there is a
zero voltage drop between the two input Compensation. Because high -gain op
terminals. The summing junction remains amps are usually used in a feedback mode,
at zero potential. Since R1 is 1000 ohms, the feedback must be controlled to assure
the 1 -volt input signal creates a current that the circuit is stable with frequency
of 1 mA through Rl and it flows also and will not oscillate if the input-output
through R2 to the output terminal. How- phase difference changes drastically. When
ever, 1 mA of current through the 10,000 - no phase compensation is furnished, the gain
ohm resistor creates a voltage drop of 10 of the feedback signal may be greater than
volts so the output terminal must go to unity when the phase angle approaches
-10 volts. Thus the configuration is a 180°. In this case, feedback that is nega-
gain -of -10 inverter.
R2=/Dit
11/V /N
/ss4
Frequency sensitive networks can be
used with op amps to create oscillators and
frequency selective amplifiers. With a ca- -/ov oar
pacitor in the feedback loop, the op amp
acts as an integrator; and with a capacitor
in the input, a differentiator is formed.
Feedback is not necessary in some op
amp circuits. For example, if one input is Fig 5. Resistor R2 is the feedback
connected to a reference voltage and the resistor while R1 is an isolator and
represents circuit input resistance.

tive at low frequencies, becomes positive at

higher frequencies and unwanted oscilla-
tion may result.
INVERTER. To overcome this tendency toward un-
wanted oscillation, the frequency response
and phase -shift characteristics of the op
atop must be compensated-that is, out-

S , OLLOJ« Q.
Fig. 4. The output of an op an -p when A

a positive step is applied to the in-

verting and the non -inverting inputs.
other to a varying input signal (sec Fig. 74/04"-
6), the open -loop amplifier will respond
to the potential difference between the
two inputs. Due to the high gain, the out-
put level will swing widely (almost equal -/O".
to the power supply voltages) as the vary-
ing voltage equals and exceeds the refer-
ence voltage. Note the input-output wave-
forms shown in Fig. 6. When the input
signal is less than the reference, the op amp
output is highly positive, and vice versa.
If the two inputs were reversed, the phase
relationships would also be reversed.
Other op amp circuits can be used as
multi -signal summers, adders, or subtrac- Fig. 6. When input exceeds reference,
tion circuits. The second part of this at:- the output is negative and vice versa.
1974 Spring Edition 37
 R/ R2

ee
.' /MEG
Sok2+-vom
S OPT/OVAL NULL
C2
R/xR2
R4_
Nctwomk R/tR2

COMPENSAI/ON
/2
R3
GAIN
/000
/00 /OOpf
p
CI
10
C2
3pf
3pf
R3

/.5k
0

-`cc /0 500pf Zopf /.5X

I 5000pf 200pf /.5k

Fig. 7. Capacitors Cl and C2, and resistor R3 form the op amp

compensation. Nulling can be via the optional resistor network.

board passive components (usually resistors given in the specification sheets but for
and capacitors) are used to tailor the fre- most purposes, the critical performance
quency response and phase -shift character- specs are power output, open-loop char-
istics. One form of compensation uses a acteristics, bandwidth, input limitations, off-
resistor and capacitor in series. In this case set voltage, and offset current.
the amount of feedback increases as the The most important specification is usu-
frequency goes up and the reactance of ally power output. The popular 709 IC
the capacitor goes down; but the upper op amp will develop x-10 volts at 5 mA
limit is determined by the resistor value output, using a bipolar 15 -volt power sup-
which remains constant at the high fre- ply. Note that the 5 mA is the total output
quencies.
Another popular form of compensation RI R2
is called output limiting and can take the
form of a low -value capacitor connected
from the output back to the input. This
output compensation is used to supple-
ment the other compensation. The type /NPUT R=R/
OUTPUT R=(RoX GA//V)/Ao
of compensation used in any case is unique GA/N= R2/R/
for the type of op amp and the application.
Sometimes compensation is obtained by /NVERTER
bypassing the op amp to ground. If an op R/ R2
amp requires compensation, suitable termi- -
nals are provided on the package. There
are sonic types that require no compensa-
tion and are so identified in the manu-
facturer's specifications. INPUT R = (Ao/GA/N)Ri
A typical circuit with compensation is DL/TPUT R = (Rox GA/N)/Ao
shown in Fig. 7. This circuit also has a GA/N= / #(122//?/)
null network which balances out the ef- FOL LONER
fect of offset voltage and current. This
RI R2
will be discussed later in more detail.
Each circuit using an op amp has cer-
tain closed -loop characteristics that must R/=,e4
be taken into account by the circuit de- R2=R5
signer. For example, Fig. 8 shows the basic /NP//T R=R/
characteristics of a follower, an inverter, R4 OUTPUT R=(Rox ßA/N)./Ao
and a difference amplifier whose output is GA/N= R2/R/
proportional to the difference between the
two inputs. Fig. 8. Three typical op amp uses. Inverter
(A) follower (B), and difference amplifier
(C). Also shown are the basic equations
Performance Limitations. Op amps have for input, output, and gain. The differ-
performance limitations-as do all elec- ence amplifier output is proportional to vol-
tronic components. These limitations are tage difference between two signal inputs.

38 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

current, including that used by the feed- specified 50,000. Fir R1=1000 ohms or
back network. less, the effect of open loop gain would be
The effects of open loop gain and dif- minimal. Of course, RI determines the in-
ferential input resistance on final circuit put resistance so this factor must be taken
performance are given in Fig. 9. To use into consideration.
the open loop gain graph, draw a vertical
line at the open loop gain of the op amp Bandwidth and Slew Rate. Suppose a
being used. Where this line cuts the curve high -frequency, high -amplitude signal is
determined by the resistance values (R2/ fed into the op amp. Because the various
RI), read the percentage of ideal gain on elements within the op amp have some
the vertical axis. In the example in Fig. 9, capacitor characteristics (mainly semi-
the open loop gain was 10,000, R2/ R1 conductor junctions and strays due to
was 1000 and the percentage was 90%, proximity of conducting paths) a finite
meaning that the gain is actually 900 (90% amount of time will be required to charge
of R2/RI ). and discharge them. This prevents the
The lower graph of Fig. 9 shows the output voltage from following the input
effect of the external resistors on open signal instantaneously. Thus, these inter-
loop gain as a function of the open loop nal capacitances limit the rate at which
input resistance. It also demonstrates that the output voltage can change or slew.
the open loap input resistance should be The maximum time rate of change of the
as high as possible. For example, a typical output is identified as the slew rate and
709 has an input resistance of 250,000 is specified as volts per microsecond. The
ohms. Draw a vertical line from this paint slew rate of a feedback amplifier depends
on the horizontal axis. If Rl is 100,000 on a number of factors, including the value
ohms, the open loop gain would then be of the closed loop gain.
77% of normal. In this case the specified Bandwidth and slew rate are related in
open loop gain is 50,000, so the actual that slew rate limits the bandwidth. The
gain woud be 38,000. This is the figure to latter is usually expressed as a large sig-
be used in determining ideal gain from the nal bandwidth or the highest frequency
upper graph in Fig. 9. For the same am- at which the amplifier will develop its
plifier, if Rl is reduced to 10,000 ohms, rated output without distortion. A par-
the open loop gain would be 95% of the ticular amplifier is capable of having a
/00t-
R21R/=10
9oi" R2/Rl=/00....-----
eoh R2

44 70-

' 60
R2/R/_/000

s
50 . . . .1
/03 /04 /05 /06
OPEN LOOP GA/Ai-A,

/00

90, R /O/ O

$ BO ! RI R2

a° 60t /" /R/=/o f ///0O e

50
/0 /D 4 /05 /06
OPEN LOOP O/FFEREN77A4 /A/PUT RES/STA/4cE-Ri (o4'AR5)
Fig. 9. Open -loop gain and differential input resistance vs performance.

1974 Spring Edition 39

 10. Simple power supply for op amp experiments.
higher frequency response with a smaller Power supplies regulated by zener diodes
output. furnish regulation close enough for most op
amp applications. A typical supply of this
Offset Error. Even though extreme care type is shown in Fig. 10. Note that neither
is used in the fabrication of an op amp, side of the filter capacitor is grounded since
a very slight mismatch may still occur be- the supply develops both positive and nega-
tween the internal components. The result tive voltages. The triangular ground symbol
of this mismatch prevents the amplifier from between the two diodes is an "instrumenta-
having a zero output for a zero input. This, tion ground" and indicates that all ground
of course, may be a problem when using the connections within the system should be
op amp in a dc circuit. Compensation for connected together but grounded to the
this offset voltage is made by using a nulling chassis at one point only. This minimizes
network such as that shown in Fig. 7, in circulating ground currents. In extreme
which the milling potentiometer is adjusted cases, the input connectors are also isolated
for zero output with zero input. from the metallic ground and connected to
the instrumentation ground only.
Common -Mode Error. Because it is very The circuit of a single -battery, zener-
difficult to create a perfectly balanced sys- controlled supply is shown in Fig. 11. The
tem, the signal present at one input of a emitter resistor should be chosen so that
differential pair may affect the signal on the the current through the zener diodes is
other input. The result is called common - about 50% above that required for the
mode error and it is smallest when the amplifier and associated load.
specification called "common -mode rejection Critical op amp circuits require extremely
ratio" is the highest. close regulation-similar to that provided
by a high -quality supply that uses one of
Power Supply Considerations. Changes the commercially available IC voltage regu-
in the power supply of an op amp circuit lators.
often change the open loop gain, the com- No matter what type of power supply
mon -mode input limits, and the input bias you use, all op amp manufacturers suggest
current. For example, the open loop gain of the use of a bypass capacitor close to the
a typical 709 doubles when the power sup- amplifier on the power supply leads. In fact
ply is changed from ± 10 to -±15 volts. this is mandatory if power supply leads are
Input voltage limits change in proportion to long. The recommended capacitor size is
the supply voltage and the bias current in- about 0.1 µF.
creases about 10% for a 50% increase in the
supply voltage.
This sensitivity to power supply voltage
seems to rule out batteries as a source but
this need not be true. Circuits of moderate
- 45v 22K
/N4002
impedance having gains of 100 or less will
not degrade appreciably if batteries with
high current capacity are used and they are
changed frequently. Mercury and recharge-
able nickel -cadmium types have "flat" dis- ,es
charge curves and give good performance
for a premium price. If battery power is a 243704
necessity, some manufacturers make discrete Fig. 11. Battery operated power sup-
amplifiers for use with unregulated supplies. ply delivers two polarity outputs.
40 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS FOR THE VERSATILE OP AMP

IN THE FIRST PART of this article, we mina's. Each terminal is identified as to

discussed the "perfect amplifier" and pin number or function, and all external
its characteristics. However, there is no components and circuits are hooked up
such thing as a perfect amplifier and we to the appropriate terminals.
must work with things that exist in the Another approach is shown in Fig. 3.
real world. So, how about applicátions Here, a 14 -pin dual in-line socket is
for the real operational amplifier? Figure mounted on a board, with a suitable
1 shows the characteristics of one typi- number of terminals around the edge.
cal low-cost op amp (Texas Instruments The circuit can then be built up between
SN72709N), which is a member of the the socket leads and the perimeter ter-
famous 709 family. minals. Figure 3 also shows how a round
This device has an open loop gain of 1'O-99 case can be inserted in the
50,000, an input resistance of 250,000 socket, with the pins properly matched.
ohms, an open loop output impedance of
150 ohms, and one microampere input Typical Applications. Although only a
few circuits will be described here, they
are basic to all of the many variations
that arc found in this and other publica-
tions. Note that, although some of the cir-

2mV(oFFS T) Fig. 1. Characteristics of typical op amp.

This has gain of 50,000, input impedance
of 250,000 ohms, and 150 -ohm output.

- /54, cuits shown here (lo not have compensa-

tion, it is always necessary to compen-
REAL IVoRLP" AMPL/F/ER sate a 709. This is not true, however, of
TYPICAL SN72709N
some other op amps so the specifications
offset current with two millivolts offset should always be checked.
voltage at the output. These are typical The two do voltmeters shown in Fig. 4
specifications for most 709 op amps, irres- illustrate some interesting points. In both
pective of manufacturer. circuits, the 5000 -ohm output resistors
The best way to experiment with an can be changed to affect the basic cir-
integrated circuit of ally kind without cuit sensitivity. For example, making this
damaging it in soldering and desolder- resistor 1000 ohms gives both volt-
ing is to make up a breadboard similar to meters full-scale ranges from 0.1 to 100
that shown in Fig. 2. Suitable solder ter- volts. Circuit A would then have an input
minals are mounted on a piece of plastic sensitivity of 100,000 ohms per volt, but
and the IC is attached to the board with circuit 13 would retain its original 10-
adhesive with its leads up. Each pin of the megohm input. Circuit B also has a null
IC is then connected to one of the ter - balance circuit since the typical offset

Fig. 2. This simple bread-

board approach may be
used to connect up an op
amp. The layout, Fig. 3,
shows the wired circuit.

1974 Spring Edition 41

 of a 709, multiplied by the gain of 100,
would produce a significant zero offset
on the meter. In this case, with the input
shorted, the null offset potentiometer is
adjusted to obtain a zero on the meter.
Such a voltmeter would be ideal not only
for solid-state testing (since it has the
necessary low-voltage scale), but also for
vacuum -tube circuits where the de volt-
age could reach 500.
A very linear ac voltmeter is shown in

Fig. 3. If you mount a dual in -line

socket on the breadboard, it can be
used for both in -line and round IC's.

/OM
/M
rig. 5. In this circuit, diode nonlinearity
/ook is minimized by the high gain of the am-
plifier. Sensitivity is the same as that of
o- . sv SK
the meter: that is, 1000 ohms per volt
for a 1 mA meter. A higher input impe-
dance can he attained by using an op
o-iMA
amp buffer in front of this circuit.
(A) The current -to -voltage transducer
20* QHMS/4aL-T VOLTME 7 -ER shown in Fig. 6 makes use of the current
20k sensitivity of the op amp to measure
9M - very small currents. As shown, the cir-
cuit indicates I volt per microampere and
is capable of 0.1 -microampere sensitivity.
/OK

5,e

(B)
/O MEG /NOUTI/OLTME7-E,e
Fig. 4. A pair of dc voltmeters using an op
amp. The circuit at (A) is 20,000 ohms per
4IE-Tt' c E',4JT E/'
volt, while that at (B) is 10 megohms per Fig. 5. Typical ac voltmeter basic circuit us-
volt. Text discusses design changes to im- ing an op amp. Although the input impedance
prove this simple design. In both cases, the is only 1000 ohms per volt, by adding an op
meter has a conventional 0-1 mA movement. amp buffer in front, impedance can be raised.

42 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 /- (N/LL/N6 REQU/R P)
M/ f-OUTPUT=/VOLT%1441P
/NP!/T
(cueeEro4/Ly>
Fig. 6. This current -to -voltage
5K circuit indicates 1 volt per mi-
croampere and is capable of at
o-/a,A least 0.1-microamp sensitivity.

Resistance values for Rl can be between ator, stages are shown in Fig. 8.
100,000 and 10,000,000 ohms to provide Note that two different input resistances
outputs from 10 µA per volt to 0.1 pA are shown-one very high, the other low
per volt. -and that the gain of either stage can be
The circuit shown in Fig. 7 is an exam- varied by changing the feedback circuit.
ple of just how far you can go in creating A word of caution: when the feedback
an ultra -high input impedance with an op potentiometers arc at their minimums,
amp. Developed by NASA, the circuit the effective load on the amplifier is 5000
has an input impedance of several hun- ohms. Be sure that the feedback resistors
dred megohms with an input capacitance do not "use up" all the available output
of less than 1 picofarad. The high impe- current.
dance is obtained by positive feedback An interesting use of the op amp is in
through Cl. The input capacitance plus frequency -selective networks. With con-
the capacitance to ground can be can- ventional discrete semiconductor circuits,
celled by adding feedback capacitor C2 it is usually necessary to use large induc-
and properly adjusting Rl. tors to perform this operation at low
The low -frequency response is deter- audio frequencies. In the circuit shown
mined primarily by Cl, for which an elec- in Fig. 9, a twin -T filter (which has a
trolytic capacitor may be used. High - resonance similar to its LC counterpart),

/N
c
A
6
is used in the feedback circuit. Figure 9
shows the method of calculating the ele-
ment values for any frequency. Unfortu-
nately, the Q of a twin -T filter is rather
small-on the order of 0.25; but, when
e/
soon
o-
1k 5k 20
OUT

Zek
/A/PUT R = /K
GA/N = 5-+-25
/NYERTER
Fig. 7. This circuit, developed by NASA, has an 2ok
input impedance of several hundred megohms 5k
with an input capacitance of less than 1 pF.

frequency response is limited by the op

amp. With a square wave applied to the
input, potentiometer Rl is adjusted to /NPUT R > 5X/070114e
obtain a square wave on the output GA/N = 6 ;-26
(similar to making a scope attenuator ad-
FOL LO/4/ER
justment). The circuit was designed to
amplify a 5-µs pulse coupled through a Fig. 8. A pair of variable attenuator circuits.
1-pF capacitor. The slew rate is approxi- The upper one has an input resistance
mately 0.5 volt per microsecond. of 1000 ohms, while bottom circuit has
Two gain -control, or variable-attenu- 50-megohm input. Gain is very similar.

1974 Spring Edition 43

 R2
/OOk

/4
Fig. 9. A frequency selective net-
work in the feedback loop of
an op amp can simulate an
LC circuit having a high Q at
audio frequencies. Both Q and
center frequency can easily be
changed by varying the RC values.
FOP /iXW
,e= 3,3K
G =. oS/uF

.2C

s
combined with the gain of the op amp, Performance Limitations. Input limita-
the Q is a reasonable value. Using an tions are applicable primarily to follower
amplifier with a gain of 10, the Q is 2.5; configurations, provided, of course, that
and with a gain of 40, the Q is 10. Thus input overloads are avoided. The sum-
an op amp, with a few passive compo- ming junction of an inverter remains at
nents, can be used to simulate a bulky, ground except when fast voltage spikes
expensive inductor; and it has the advan- or extremely high voltages are applied.
tages of a center frequency and Q that In the first case, feedback is too slow to
are easily controlled over a wide fre- protect the summing junction; while in
quency range. the second case, the output stage satu-
Another audio filter; this one generat- rates and is unable to divert the input
ing a notch at the selected frequency and current. In followers, the summing junc-
having a variable Q, is shown in Fig. 10. tion moves in step with the input voltage
The input to the positive terminal of so that, in some circuits, the input must
the op amp is combined with feedback be restricted to 15 volts. In Fig. 4B, for
through the bridge -T network. The other example, the divider restricts the sum-
input is variable. When the signal lev- ming junction excursions until the output
els at both inputs are equal, there is no stage saturates. The amplifier has a gain
output from the amplifier. System gain is of 100 (101 if the resistor values are
still R2/R1. By adjusting the "SET" con- exact) , and an input in excess of 0.1 volt
trol, a small notch at the filter frequency would saturate the amplifier at an output
is obtained. As the "Q ADJUST" con- over 10 volts. If a 10 -volt input were al-
trol is brought near the filter end, the lowed, the summing junction would he
feedback increases, controlling the Q of driven so high that the input transistors
the circuit. The frequency is determined in the op amp would probably be de-
by the values of the filter capacitors and stroyed.
the setting of the ganged potentiometers. Performance limitations having to do

Fig. 10. This audio filter per-

mits changing both Q and center
OUT
frequency via pair of controls.

44 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 FAIRCHILD LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS irA748

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (V5 = ±15 V, TA = 25°C unless otherwise specified) 709

PARAMETERS CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNITS

Input Offset Voltage Rs<10kit 1.0 .Q 10 mV

Input Offset Current 20 2.0S 750 nA
Input Bias Current 80 2,000 nA
Input Resistance 2.0 05 Mn
Input Capacitance 1.4 pF
Large-Signal Voltage Gain RE > 2 kit, V°L1 = ±10 V 50,0000 200,000 12,000
Output Resistance 75 150 SZ
Output Short -Circuit Current 25 mA
Power Consumption 50 85 mW
Transient Response (unity gain) V, = 20 mV, C = 30 pF, RE = 2 kit, CE<100 pF
Risetime 0.3 0.3 .µs
Overshoot 5.0 10 %
Slew Rate RE > 2 kit 0.5 V/ps

GENERAL DESCRIPTION -The .µA748 is a high performance monolithic operationar amplifier constructed on
a single silicon chip, using the Fairchild Planar° epitaxial process. It is intended for a wide range of analog
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
applications where tayloring of frequency characteristics is desirable. High common mode voltage range and
(TOP VIEW)
absence of "latch -up" make the 4,A748 ideal for use as a voltage follower. The high gain and wide range of
operating voltages provide superior performance in integrator, summing amplifier, and general feedback appli-
cations. The 4,11748 is short-circuit protected and has the same pin configuration as the popular µA741 FREQUENCY
operational amplifier. Unity gain frequency compensation is achieved by means of a single 30 pF capacitor. COMPENSATION

Of (SET NULL
709
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Supply Voltage ±18V ±22 V INVERTING
NPUT
OUTPUT

Internal Power Dissipation (Note 1) 500 mW

Differential Input Voltage ±5V ±30 V
0 NULL
Input Voltage (Note 2) ±10V ±15V
Storage Temperature Range -65°C to }150°C V

Operating Temperature Range -55°C to +125°C

NOTE Pin a connected m case
Lead Temperature (Soldering, 60 seconds) 300°C
Output Short -Circuit Duration (Note 3) 5 sec. Indefinite

NOTES:
(I) Rating applies for case temperatures to 125C; derate linearly at 6.5 mW/C for ambient temperatures above +75°C.
(2) For supply voltages less than ±15 V, the absolute maximum input voltage is equal to the supply voltage.
(3) Short circuit may be to ground or either supply. Rating applies to +125C case temperature or +75C ambient temperature.

Fig. 11. This is portion of specifications sheet on the 748 op amp with "worst case"
parameters underlined. Specs of typical 709 have been added for comparison purposes.

with offset voltage and current are large- which may be confusing to the uniniti-
ly inconvenience factors. External null ated. Figure 11, for instance, shows part
circuits balance out offsets over a small of the information given on the Fair-
range of ambient temperatures. Offset ef- child µA748 op amp. Note the two col-
fects (as well as open loop gain and input umns headed "709" which have been
resistance) vary with ambient tempera- added to the illustration for comparison
ture, so circuits that must operate in purposes. Some of the performance fig-
changing temperatures should be designed ures have been underlined. These are
around amplifiers with low offset. Op amp "worst case" conditions and should be
circuits with low values of Rl and R2 are used in circuit design. Also note that
not bothered by offset currents, while cir- some specifications are accompanied by
cuits with low closed loop gain suffer lit- "conditions" (such as a specified load re-
tle from offset voltage. For special appli- sistor). When comparing amplifiers, these
cations, where extreme accuracy and/or conditions must always be identical. All
stability is needed, it is important to consid- specifications are always for the open
er not only the open loop characteristics of loop configuration unless otherwise noted
the amplifier, but also the accuracy and on the sheets.
temperature stability of the external com- By now, you should have a pretty good
ponents. idea what an operational amplifier is and
In choosing an amplifier for a given ap- how it is used. The next step is to keep
plication, the manufacturer's specifica- your eyes open as you review the tech-
tion sheets should always be consulted. nical literature and be aware of the wide
Unfortunately, these sheets often contain variety of op amp circuits available. Then
an amazing amount of information- put them to good use. O.
1974 Spring Edition
45
 lu/Id
lass Ref/ex
Enclosures
the
Easy Way
SOME HINTS

ON SUCCESSFUL

DESIGN

AND CONSTRUCTION

BY DAVID B. WEEMS

THE bass reflex speaker enclosure is a minimize cone travel and distortion at the
perennial favorite of home hi-fi builders. bottom of the reproduced frequency range?
Perhaps one reason for its popularity is Then again, he might ponder whether or
that most of the hi-fi component speak- not to tune the box at the higher frequency
ers sold are designed for bass reflex opera- of the speaker plus box (before porting)
tion. But a ported enclosure also offers a system resonance. Each of these methods of
more interesting project than does a simple tuning is used by various manufacturers.
box. Even the name of the system suggests The experimenter with unusual tastes in
something special in bass performance. This sound can, by stressing the quality he de-
appeal sometimes inspires reckless applica- sires, end up with a system that is not only
tion of reflex theory which can result in a more original but more satisfying to his
mistuned "boom box." ear than the typical commercial system. As
It is not easy-but far from impossible one loudspeaker engineer points out, the
-for the experimenter to successfully de- amateur speaker system builder is some-
sign his own bass reflex enclosure. First times a "strange bird." Perhaps his urge
he must face a myriad of decisions. He to be creative is stronger than the desire
must decide at the outset if he wants to to obtain good sound.
emphasize bass output and range or con-
centrate on obtaining optimum transient Some Simple Do's. The home builder
response. can obtain optimum performance from his
Of the questions he will most likely ask loudspeaker, as defined by those who ought
himself, one is should the box be tuned to to know, by following the design booklets
control the cone at the speaker's free-air published by the manufacturer. Data sheets
resonance or to some lower frequency to are packed right in the speaker's shipping
46 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 carton; so, one needs only to buy the speak-
er before beginning work on the enclosure.
Ports can be used with boxes of vari-
ous sizes, but the principle is particularly
useful for full-size systems. Typical of the
kind of component speaker available for
bass reflex operation is the Electro -Voice
Model LT15, a 15" three-way loudspeaker
for which the enclosure shown in the photos
was designed. r
Three-way speakers offer several advant-
ages for the home builder. Most obvious is
the simplified installation in a single speaker
cutout. But, more important, the concen-
tric mounting of all reproducing elements
eliminates the problem of where to mount
the mil range and/or tweeter reproducers
for minimum phase distortion at the cross-
over frequencies. MODEL LT1
:3 WAY
Our speaker system was put together 11-INC! Nit 1.0905PEAIf9
without the need for cut -and -try efforts.
Its very satisfactory performance can be Read information sheet packed in with
described with one vword-smooth. The speaker first. If size range is sug-
enclosure dimensions chosen were the great- gested, choose largest one possible.
est of the three sets of figures given on the
Electro-Voice data sheet that accompanied size that is specifically recommended by the
the speaker. This brings up a useful rule of manufacturer to obtain the best results.
thumb: Choose the largest possible enclosure Here are some more construction hints
that will help smooth the way. Use %"-
When installiig speaker, do not over - thick plywood with tight cores. Except for
tighten hardware. Note duct behind the
port which permits use of larger port. the removable rear panel, glue and screw
together all joints. Use solid wood for glue
blocks at the corners and for the cleats that
hold the screws for the speaker and rear
panels. Reinforce the panels, particularly
the large ones, with braces. Mount the
speaker off -center if possible to reduce
standing waves in the enclosure. Install a
1" -or -greater thickness of fiberglass wool or
other acoustical clamping material on the
rear panel and walls inside the enclosure to
absorb the midrange and high -frequency
sound and prevent its reflection through
the speaker cone or the port. Curd
against air leaks.
The only possible need for experimenta-
tion is in the amount of fiberglass to use.
A fiberglass collar, stapled over the speaker,
sometimes improves speaker clamping.
The duality of a bass reflex enclosure
depends upon proper design and sturdy con-
struction. The loudspeaker manufacturer
provides the design parameters. The audio-
phile who follows them need only concern
himself with careful carpentry to prevent
panel vibration and air leaks. A flair for
originality can be expressed in external
style and finish.

1974 Spring Edition 47

 THE DIFFERENT

Resistance
Decade
Unusual, economical switching arrangement
BY JAMES A. FRED

ARE several different approaches the one and two units and switch in the
THERE
that can be taken to the design of a re- four units at the same time. The total resis-
sistance decade box. One simply switches tance jumps during switching either a value
increasing values of resistors, while others below three or above four. Such a condition
use tricky switching arrangements that add may not be important in many cases, but it
four values of resistance (1,2,3, and 4) to may cause damage to a highly sensitive
make 10 units per switch. galvanometer or a delicate piece of elec-
All of these schemes have their drawbacks tronic equipment.
-from either a cost, production, or use Described here is a switching scheme for
standpoint. Take the case where four re- a resistance decade that solves many of the
sistors are used to add up to 10. There are problems mentioned above and is simple
bound to be switching irregularities in this and inexpensive to build. Six identical re-
process since it is impossible to switch out sistors are used in each decade to provide
48 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 PARTS LIST
For X1 decade:
-2
-ohm resistor (Mallory 3AE or
R1 -R6
Ohmite 995-3A)
For X10 decade:
R1 -R6 -20 -ohm resistor (Mallory 3AE or
Ohmite 995-3A)
For X100 decade:
R1 -R6 -200 -ohm. resistor (Mallory 3AE or
Ohmite 995-3A)
For X1K decade:
R1 -R6 -2000 -ohm resistor (Mallory 3AE or
Ohmite 995-3A)
2 a For X10K decade:
R1 -R6-20,000 -ohm resistor (Mallory
402 2MOL22k or Ohmite 995-5B)
10
For X100K decade:
RI
R1 -R6 -200,000 -ohm resistor (IRC RC2)
S1-Two-pole, 12 -position rotary switch (one
per decade)*
Misc.-Suitable chassis, knobs, five -way bind-
ing posts (2), wire, solder, etc.
Fig. 1. Any number of decades can be made *Available as JMSW1 from J & M Electron-
using this same circuit. Note that the two ics, Rte 1, Box 28, Cutler, IN 46920 at $4
rotors are displaced one position apart. each, $3.00 each in lots of 6, postpaid. Indi-
ana residents add 2% state sales tax.

Typical switch showing how the associated resistors are mounted directly
to the contacts. Make sure that each resistor is isolated from each of
the others and from the chassis to insure against accidental shorts.
1974 Spring Edition 49
 When building several decades, use resistors having same tolerance and wattage. Certain
terminals on two wafers of each switch are stapled together. Note decade interconnections.

10 smooth equal steps. A schematic of one Construction. The six -switch decade box
decade switch is shown in Fig. 1. The secret shown in the photographs was constructed
of the scheme is in the values of the resis- in a 5" X 9',' X 2" aluminum chassis hav-
tors and in the switch arrangement. The ing a removable top. The chassis size is not
rotors on the two wafers of the switch are important as long as it can comfortably
offset by one place to provide smooth oper- support the selected number of switches
ation. The resistors are twice the value that and the output five -way binding posts. Con-
would ordinarily be used for a particular struction and operation will be greatly
decade. That is, for the X 1 decade the improved by the use of the special switch
resistors are all 2 ohms; for the x 10 decade, specified in the Parts List. This swich has
they are 20 ohms; etc. To provide the even its two sections staggered as required and
values (2, 4, 6, 8, and 101, the resistors are has the proper terminals on each wafer
connected in series. To provide the odd stapled together to make the necessary
values, the sixth resistor "floats" from one electrical contact.
position to another so that it is in parallel Mire the switches as shown in Fig. 1.
with one of the other five, thus giving a re- Test each switch after completion with an
sistance value equivalent to 1. Several fac- ohmmeter. Connect the switch outputs in
tors must be taken into consideration when series. flake sure that resistors are not
planning the decade box. First, the wattage touching each other or the chassis. If high -
of the resistors must be decided. This, of wattage resistors are used, it is advisable to
course, depends on where you are going to make several ventilation holes in the chassis.
use the instrument. Then, the overall range Mark the switch positions and the multipli-
of resistance must be determined. Six cation factor with press -on type. Once
switches will produce resistance values in complete, use an ohmmeter to check the
one -ohm steps from one ohm to one meg- overall operation of the box.
ohm. Eight switches will allow coverage To use, connect the decade box binding
from 0.1 ohm to 10 megohms. posts to the required external circuit and
The accuracy of the decade box must also position the switches to obtain the total
be considered. Low -tolerance resistors cost value of resistance required. The zero posi-
more than higher tolerance types. However, tion of each switch forms a short across it,
5% tolerance should prove adequate for thus effectively removing it from the cir-
general work. cuit. O
50 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 ECIBEL TABE
Voltage Voltage
Ratio Power db Ratio Power
(Equal
Impedance)
Ratio t (Equal Ratio
Impedance)

1.000 1.000 0 1.000 1.000

0.989 0.977 0.1 1.012 1.023
0.977 0.955 0.2 1.023 1.047
0.966 0.933 0.3 1.035 1.072
0.955 0.912 0.4 1.047 1.096
0.944 0.891 0.5 1.059 1.122
0.933 0.871 0.6 1.072 1.148
0.923 0.851 0.7 1.084 1.175
0.912 0.832 0.8 1.096 1.202
0.902 0.813 0.9 1.109 1.230
0.891 0.794 1.0 1.122 1.259
0.841 0.708 1.5 1.189 1.413
0.794 0.631 2.0 1.259 1.585
0.750 0.562 2.5 1.334 1.778
0.708 0.501 3.0 1.413 1.995
0.668 0.447 3.5 1.496 2.239
0.631 0.398 4.0 1.585 2.512
0.596 0.355 4.5 1.679 2.818
0.562 0.316 5.0 1.778 3.162
0.531 0.282 5.5 1.884 3.548
0.501 0.251 6.0 1.995 3.981
0.473 0.224 6.5 2.113 4.467
0.447 0.200 7.0 2.239 5.012
0.422 0.178 7.5 2.371 5.623
0.398 0.159 8.0 2.512 6.310
0.376 0.141 8.5 2.661 7.079
0.355 0.126 9.0 2.818 7.943
0.335 0.112 9.5 2.985 8.913
0.316 0.100 10 3.162 10.00
0.282 0.0794 11 3.55 12.6
0.251 0.0631 12 3.98 15.9
0.224 0.0501 13 4.47 20.0
0.200 0.0398 14 5.01 25.1
0.178 0.0316 15 5.62 31.6
0.159 0.0251 16 6.31 39.8
0.141 0.0200 17 7.08 50.1
0.126 0.0159 18 7.94 63.1
0.112 0.0126 19 8.91 79.4
0.100 0.0100 20 10.00 100.0
3.16x10-- 10-3 30 3.16x10 10'
10-= 10-4 40 10' 104
3.16x10-3 10-' 50 3.16x10' 105
10-s 10-6 60 103 106
3.16x10-4 10-' 70 3.16x103 10'
10-4 10-8 80 104 109
3.16x10 10-° 90 3.16x104 10°
10-' 10-10 100 10" 1016
3.16x 10-6 10-11 110 3.16x10 10'1
10-R 10--" 120 106 101'

1974 Spring Edition 51

 Buïlda
Di stortïonless
Preamplifier PREPARING FOR FOUR CHANNEL?
YOU MAY WANT TO USE THIS PREAMP

BY JAMES BONGIORNO

T ILE ADVENT of four-channel stereo tuallv impossible to overload this unit with
need not necessarily obsolete your pres- any cartridge presently available (at any
ent hi-fi system. Regardless of which four- frequency). The gain at 1 kHz is 42 dB
channel system is finally agreed on as a (125 times) which means that even the
standard, we feel that it's a safe bet that most sensitive of cartridges may be used.
the conventional two-channel front end will But along with this high gain, the noise
remain and the four-channel decoding will level is 0.7 µV referred to the input (63
take place after this stage. Therefore, it is dB below 1 mV) Since some audio mea-
.

more important than ever that the two -chan- surements laboratories state noise as so
nel front end be of the best quality avail- many dB's below 10 mV, this unit has a
able. In essence, what you need is a noise - figure of -83 dB below 10 mV, which
free, distortionless, nonoverloading amplifier makes it a very quiet operator.
that will follow the RIAA curve faithfully. The output level is about 12 volts rms;
The phono preamplifier whose schematic and below 4 volts output, the distortion is
is shown ill Fig. 1 (only one channel is just about unmeasurable, rising to 0.1%
shown) comes as close to this "perfect" pre - at the 12 -volt output. This high level of
amp as the state of the art permits. It is vir- output is available across the audio band -
52 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 o

'A1NN
O
o
a

.
o
e
.

y .

--
_
J _
vh
e

ñ -,-----.
- ~é
F-
JV_
N
u.1

-
.ee
O

ti
2 e
`_
.
OI
_
.Nÿÿ
G
.

_~
0
L>",72'2,'"1.
eK~
`
ÿÑ
° °. r....N

O
i
,
-ti

2
2< ... GOO',.`1
á
1- erVo.r,-.
O TJ

OMti Çá
E
E
ó o
O

" I Iç1..,tiÑ oó
J
..c..,--,t..--.
g

._
-.:7--
. E-.-.

cj
¡
E~
Ó

Ó ='C
ç`y° o,, o
o,óvóccó
oó E
l"
e
^ _ --
t.9:4!

°
..
::
e

.O I1Q.tl I ÿMM
e
C C:) ÿ
oYá`
Ì , tióhó
-
;-,,,,,9",3.-
" eeHo
.
00 ó
ó^ro, acg eó
o
..z =[-C rn
o ó

I` dxx II I cr- ,.ti.I,

TZ, c...,%.,.., .c°

Q
`.2

O
ä
ti ^. I
UUQ0.v)QVV:JJUJU ,y e ti=V M,r', ,o
I I I
M^
,¡-V !V ti N rh ,n h o.
n
+
h W o,U,z.c>cec40.'0.'0.'CC1Y'4'c4.... I
GC
ti

1974 Spring Edition 53

width of 20 to 20,000 Hz. The feedback With only the power supply operating,
loop maintains the frequency response flat to connect a voltmeter between terminal K
within x-0.5 dB of the ideal RIAA curve. and ground. The indicated voltage should
There is also a switch to change the feed- be -47 volts. If it is a little higher, connect
back loop to provide a flat response for use a 40,000- to 60,000 -ohm resistor across R23
with an optional microphone input. to bring the voltage down to -47. If you
have a sensitive millivoltmeter, check to see
Construction. The foil pattern shown in that the noise at this terminal is below 200
Fig. 2 covers both channels of a stereo pair. µV. There should be no ripple at all when
The component indications are the same for the output voltage of the supply is viewed
both channels, with R18, CIO, D1 and D2, on a scope.
and SI common to both channels. Before mounting either the power supply
The schematic of the power supply for
the amplifier is shown in Fig. 3. It would
appear at first glance to be somewhat elab-
orate but it is essential that the system be
free of hum since the amplifier gain at 60
°1111111111111 t ó
Hz is almost 60 dB. For the same reason,
transformer T1 is a fully shielded toroid. In
11111ä11u1111 11b
addition to the -43 volts used in the ampli-
fier, the supply also provides -47 volts for
powering other circuits. The regulator will
handle up to 100 mA. The foil pattern and
component layout for the power supply are
shown in Fig. 4 on page 56.
°
ïïïp,l"°50°Rï
B°'1115
.3) C10
O O O

1
11
10
SO

CO

" 82 R] RI 01O O O RIO

1
OO
L OO OO
11 YPC7R9--0
512

Fig. 2. Foil pattern shown below is 1 l1o

for both channels of the preamp.
Component layout is shown at right. 1i111qt1.111 t°
®11111b1111111! tp

54 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 R22
05 IOOK
-47V
=
152070
T (4)
D6 R19 05
4308 2N3053

-
50V 43V
R25
22011
D4
R20
C11 2K
500íF +
R23
6.2K
(SEE
TEXT)

R21
2.7K
04
2N5087
C13r
I0NF v
C14 +
I000yF

C12
10CF D7 R24
16V 2.7K

GNG AT PHONO J
INPUT JACK ONLY
/ Fig. 3. The power supply circuit is
more elaborate than some but this is
essential to proper preamp operation.

PARTS LIST
POWER SUPPLY
JI SI J2 (.11-500-µF, 70-volt electrolytic capacitor
(32-10-µF, 16 -volt tantalum capacitor
C/3 -10-µF, 35 -volt electrolytic capacitor
(:14-1000-µF, 50 -volt electrolytic capacitor
112 -l)6 -1N2070 diode
117 1h -molt, I -watt, 2% zener diode
II II7-molt neon, lamp
(t l 2N5087 transistor
-2N3053 transistor
R19 -430 -ohm, 2 -watt, 5% resistor
DUAL R20 -2000 -ohm, 10% resistor
PRE AMP R21.R24-2700-ohm, 5% resistor
BOARD R22.R26-100,000-ohm, 20% resistor
R25 -6200 -ohm resistor (see text)
R25--220-ohm resistor
SO1-II7-volt chassis mount receptacle
TI- -Shielded toroid transformer; 50V at 100
in l
-Pilot lamp holder, line cord. rubber
C14 CII 1 (-11, suitable chassis (Bud C11-482 I.
t.
heat sink for Q5 (Wakefield 296-4), ter-
05 minal strip, mounting hardware, etc.
:Autc: Transformer TI is available from
TI
James Bongiorno, c/o Bullock Magnetics.
2805 :Metropolitan Place, Pomona, Cali?.
(11767 for -ß'I4.50 plus postage for 1 lb.
R26

or the preamp in the chassis, interconnect

the two boards, with terminal L of the sup-
ply to terminal C of the preamp, and ter-
minal J of the supply to B on the preamp.
Preamp board and power supply should Connect a dc voltmeter between the junc-
not be mounted in chassis before con- tion of C5 and R11 (negative) and ground
ducting the tests as described in text. (pt;sitis-e) in one channel. Turn on the
1974 Spring Edition 55
 o o o
1
R19

o<
l f
qq
04 D6
CH

S
DJ DO

o db o
Fig. 4. Except for T1 and components
in its primary, power supply is laid
out (above) on the board (at the left).
tion of C5 and RI1, solder in both R6's.
When installing the amplifier board, use one
of the input jack chassis connections as the
common ground, making this the only chas-
sis connection. The ground wire to the pow -

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Gain: 60 dB at 20 Hz, 42dB at 1kHz,
23 dB at 20 kHz; all within 0.5 dB of
o o RIAA.
Gain with Microphone: within 0.5 dB
power and wait until the voltage being mea- from 20 to 20,000 Hz.
sured reaches a maximum-it will take a Sensitivity: 0.8 millivolt rms with 100
minute or more. Temporarily connect a millivolts output.
fixed resistor (between 50,000 and 80,000 Noise: 0.7 microvolt unweighted (RIAA
ohms) where R6 is supposed to be in this bandwidth referred to shorted input).
channel. The resistor should be such that Maximum Output before Clipping: 12
the voltage being measured is as close as volts rms, 20 to 20,000 Hz.
possible to -21.5 volts. Do the same for the Input Overload: 13 mV at 20 Hz, 100 mV
at 1 kHz, 850 mV at 20 kHz.
other channel; then recheck the first chan- Distortion: Unmeasurable at 1 -volt out-
nel as the two are slightly interactive. Once put, increasing gradually to about
both channels have 21.5 volts at the junc- 0.2% at clipping.

PROJECT EVALUATION er supply should he removed and a ground

HIRSCH-HOUCK LABORATORIES wire run from the power supply point J to
The preamplifier does just about what the selected input jack.
the designer claims for it. Gain measure- Mount the shielded transformer on the
ments, in general, were within 0.5 dB of chassis, and place the heat sink on tran-
the author's claims and show a loss of sistor Q5 of the power supply. The physical
only 1.4 dB at 20 Hz relative to the arrangement of the other chassis compon-
extrapolated RIAA curve. Phono overload ents and connectors is not critical.
occurs at a very safe 110 millivolts, and
the clipping level from the output is Operation. To use the preamplifier in your
14.7 volts, something of a record in our
present stereo system, simply plug the turn-
experience.
Distortion is really negligible, typically
table signal cables into the input jacks (JI)
0.013 to 0.03% over most of the useful and run the output jacks (J2) to the AUX
range of the amplifier (even up to 10 inputs of your amplifier. Don't forget to
volts output). The measurement of phase all the ac plugs to get the lowest
0.31% at 125 millivolts output was part- hum. If you find that you need a ground
ly hum and partly noise, but both were on the turntable chassis, run a wire from it
extremely low. The combined hum/noise to the mounting screw closest to the pre-
output was about 100 microvolts. amplifier input jack that was selected as the
common ground. QQ

56 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

doA't miss...
the next issue of the
magazine that gives
you the most exciting
ELECTRONIC
build -it -yourself EXPERIMENTER'S
projects anywhere. HANDBOOK
You can always count on ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENT-
ER'S HANDBOOK. Published twice each year by the
editors of Popular Electronics, it's the one publication
that helps you get it together with a score. . .

of build -it -yourself projects.

YOU CAN The next all -new edition, 1975 Winter, goes
RESERVE on sale nationally September 19, 1974.
It will again be packed with features and
YOUR COPY NOW AT articles and complete lab -tested instruc-
tions that are sure to guarantee success-
THE SPECIAL ful hours and months of mind absorbing
projects for fun and practicality.
MONEY -SAVING This offer is being made to readers
of the HANDBOOK and POPULAR
PRE -PUBLICATION
PRICE ELECTRONICS Magazines only.
Regular price is $1.25; mail order
OF ONLY $1.00 price $1.60. You can reserve your copy
now at this special pre -publication price of
POSTPAID. only $1 by completing the Reservation Form
and returning it promptly along with your re-
mittance. The 1975 Winter ELECTRONIC EX-
PERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK will be mailed to
you on or before publication date from first -off -
the -press copies.
®®®®®®®®®®®®®
®®® Electronic Experimenter's
Handbook, Ziff -Davis Service
Division, 595 Broadway, N.Y., N.Y. 10012.
PRE -PUBLICATION Enclosed is $1.00. Please reserve my copy of the
RESERVATION 1975 Winter ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HAND-
BOOK at this special pre -publication price, to be mailed
to me from first -off -the -press copies on or before September
FORM 19, 1974.

Print Name
Address
City
Stace Zip

PLEASE ENCLOSE PAYMENT WITH ORDER

1974 Spring Edition 57

 AN IMPROVED
FOZJI -virAY
FLASHER
AVOID THE PITFALLS OF MOST COMMERCIAL UNITS
BY DONALD R. HICKE

NOW THAT ALL NEW CARS are re- more important, flashing stops if the brakes
quired to have emergency flashing -light are applied. This could have serious conse-
systems, owners of older cars will want to quences during those first critical moments
add similar systems to their cars. There is a when the car is being positioned at the side
wide variety of do-it-yourself kits available of the road.
for the purpose. Some are better than others, The better commercial kits are called
but nearly all of them have operational "emergency flashers" and they contain a
quirks that, for one reason or another, make fuse, a heavy-duty flasher, and an indicator
them less than ideal. light. The flasher output is connected to all
For instance, one cheap kit consists of four turn -signal lamps to flash them togeth-
nothing more than a switch which is in- er. The main disadvantage to this unit is that
stalled so that, when it is on, all four turn - it also is inoperative when the brakes are
signal lights flash in unison when the turn applied. In another kit the indicator lamp is
lever is moved to either position. This ar- connected to one of the rear turn -signal
rangement has two serious faults. First, the lamps, which of course doubles as a brake
flasher mechanism in the car was designed light, and the "emergency" indicator comes
to handle only two lamps, and the addition- on whenever the brakes are applied. This is
al load imposed by the added pair shortens very annoying for night driving.
its life. This could eventually leave the driver An improved four-way flasher system is
with 110 flashing lights at all. Secondly, and shown in the schematic. The main difference
is in the manner of connecting the FLASH-
OFF switch and indicator lamp. The switch
PARKING LIGHT SWITCH PARKING
connects the flasher to the stop light and to
LIGHTS` the front parking lights for emergency flash-
G ing. It also opens the normal circuits to these
lights so that applying the brakes or turning
on the parking lights does not stop the flash-
FLASHER F ASH I
ing. The indicator lamp monitors the parking
TUNG-SOL
535
I
LAMP lights instead of the brake lights and serves
as a warning signal in case the parking lights
are inadvertently left on.
The improved four-way flasher may be
STOPLIGHTL
SWITCH STOP IGHTS
constructed in a small metal box and fastened
BAT. TURN
under the dash. A much neater arrangement,
SIGNAL however, is to mount the switch and indi-
SWITCH

i cator lamp right on the dash and locate the

flasher and fuse out of sight. To avoid con-
fusion with other indicator lights on the
Components to be added to the standard au- dashboard, be sure to use a different colored
tomotive circuit shown inside dashed -line box. lens over the flasher indicator.
58 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 The two r -f transformers, T2 and T3,

Tuner are conventional 262-kHz types with trim-

mer capacitors to bring their frequency
down to the 160 -190-kHz range. The an-
tenna coil, Tl, is a TV horizontal width

for the coil with 30 turns of #28 enameled wire

added as the coupling coil.
The tuner has three controls: R15 for
audio gain, R18 for r -f gain, and S2, the
standby switch. The ac control switch, SI,
is mounted on R15.

Neglected Construction. The prototype of the tuner

was built on a 7" x 9" X 2" aluminum
chassis (the same as the transmitter) and

Band the general layout is shown in Fig. 2. The

large holes for tubes, transformers, etc.
were made with chassis punches, while all
the smaller holes were drilled. Mount the
components so that interconnecting leads
are as short as possible. A number of ter-
BUILD THIS COMPANION minal strips were used below the chassis to
support most of the components. The trim-
TUNER FOR THE mer capacitors for T2 and T3 were soldered
directly to the appropriate terminals on the
LICENSE -FREE TRANSMITTER transformers.
The 30 turns of #28 wire on Tl are
DESCRIBED ON PAGE 14 wound directly on top of the coil and in the
same direction as the turns on the coil.
BY JIM WHITE, W5LET When wiring T6, the oscillator coil, be sure
to follow the manufacturer's recommended
connections or the converter will not oscil-
ON PAGE 14, we described a one -watt late.
transmitter for the 160 -190 -kHz band.
Adjustments. With the power turned on,
Now we will discuss a companion long -wave
make sure that all four filaments heat up,
tuner. and carefully check for the presence of
The circuit, shown in Fig. 1, uses four
conventional vacuum tubes and requires
only an audio amplifier and antenna to make
it a top-notch receiver. Headphones can be
connected directly to the audio output if
desired. Both V1 and V2 are r -f amplifiers
and are adjusted to the same frequency as
the transmitter you will be receiving.
The very low power of the transmitter
makes it necessary to have a sensitive tuner,
so two r -f stages are used. Also, two r-f
stages provide a better rejection of strong
BCB signals that can creep into a low -
frequency converter. The use of two fixed
tuned stages also eliminates the problem of
tracking, with its increase in cost.
Following the two r -f stages is V.3, a
converter stage, where the input frequency
is changed to 455 kHz. This is then ampli- This bottom view of the tuner shows
fied by V4. Diode Dl is both the AM how point-to-point wiring was used.
detector and age device. The power supply The adjustment for T6, the oscilla-
is a conventional half -wave type. tor coil, is near the top right corner.
1974 Spring Edition 59
 ANT
f
C7 ¡' EsT2
VI 25- V2 259-..C-
6BJ6 5 280
pF
68J6 5 2pF80
7
6 6

TI
J CB
-4125-280pF
KD
74
470pF 7-3yF 0IyF .0I jF

-t- T5
C2
OIuF
RI R2 R3 /R4 R5 R6
100K 68/1 IK IOOK 6811 IK

C24
.2NF)

-
RI9
100K

R17 R16 R18

10K
1011 47011 RF GAIN
7 02 S2
SI + + STANDBY
C23B
30yF T70NF

I17VAC
TC23A

I
ALL FILAMENTS

PARTS LIST C20,C21-750-pF, 500 -volt disc ceramic ca-

C1-470-pF, 500 -volt mica capacitor pacitor
C2-C5,C11,C12,C16-C19-0.01-µ1', 500 -volt, C22 -0.01-µF, 400 -volt capacitor
disc ceramic capacitor C23-Dual 30-µF and 70-µF, 150 -volt elec-
C6 --0.02-µF, 400 -volt capacitor trolytic capacitor
C7-C70-25-280-pF compression trimmer C24 0.2-µF, 200 -volt capacitor
capacitor Dl-Signal diode (1N34Á or similar)
C13-150-pF, 500 -volt silver mica capacitor D2-600 V, 750 mA rectifier diode
C14-500-pF, 500 -volt silver mica capacitor Jl-Coaxial connector
(:15-0.02-µF, 500 -volt disc ceramic capacitor J2-Phono connector

plate and screen voltage on the tubes. Con- one of two ways: if you have a well -cali-
nect an audio cable from 12 to an audio brated oscillator that tunes to 160-190 kHz,
amplifier. The first adjustment is that of things will be simplified; or if you have
T6, the oscillator coil. This can be made built the companion transmitter, you can
by using a conventional BCB radio in close use it. In either case, connect a VTVM
proximity to the receiver. Assume you want across C6 (in the age line) with the nega-
to tune to 175 -kHz. Add this to the i -f tive lead to the line. Now with the appro-
frequency (455 kHz) and the result is 630 priate long -wave signal injected into the
kHz. Tune the BCB radio to 630 kHz and antenna circuit, you should get some indica-
slowly adjust the slug of T6 until you hear tion on the meter. Adjust C7, C8, C9, and
the signal from the oscillator. Lock the T6 C10 for a maximum indication. Then adjust
slug with a jam nut or a drop of cement the slugs of TI, T4, and T5 to further in-
on the threads. crease the meter indication. You may have
The other adjustments can be made in to decrease the signal generator output or
60 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 DI
IN34A

J 2 L
411---
C18 C19
-)150pF
C20
.019F .OIyF
J2
AUDIO
OUT

C21
15OpF C22
RIO 6 R12 R14 .OIyF
I00K 686 R IK IM

Fig. 1. Schematic and parts list for the low-frequency tuner

are shown here. Although transistors could have been employed
.oz T
in the design, readily available vacuum tubes were chosen.
Note that two r -f stages (V1 and V2) were used in design be-
cause the power of the transmitter requires a very sensi-
tive tuner. The converter stage is V3, and V4 is the amplifier.

R1,R4,R10-100,000-ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor T2.T3-262-kHz miniature i -f transformer

R2,R5,R11-68-ohm, -u att resistor
1
(Miller 12H1 or similar)
R3,R6,R9,R12-1000-ohm, 'o -watt resistor T4,T5-455-kHz miniature i -f transformer
R7 -27,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor (Miller 120.1 or similar)
R8 -10,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor T6-Oscillator coil Meissner 14-1028 broad-
Rl3,R14-1-megohm, ?<2 -watt resistor cast type
R15-1-megohm, audio taper potentiometer T7-Transformer; secondaries: 125 V at
with switch Si 50 mA and 6.3 V at 2 A
R16 -470 -ohm, 2-watt resistor V1,V2,V4 6BJ6 tube
R17 -10 -ohm, 1-toatt resistor V3-6BE6 tube
R18 -10,000-ohm, 2 -watt linear taper potenti- Misc.-Chassis (Bud AC406 or similar), 7-
ometer pin miniature tube socket (4), knobs, ter-
R19 -100,000 -ohm, 1 -watt resistor minal strips, ground lugs, rubber grom-
S1-Spst switch on R15 mets, line cord, mounting hardware, short
S2-Spst slide or toggle switch lengths of #28 enamelled wire for T1, short
TI-TV width coil, 0.5-5 mH (Miller 6313 or length of thin coaxial cable for antenna
similar) connector.

17 C23
Fig. 2. This view of the top of the
T5 tuner shows how components were ar-
ranged on chassis for the prototype.
V4
move the transmitter farther away to keep
RI from overloading the receiver.
:2 T4

TI Operation. With the low -frequency tuner

V3
properly aligned and with a long antenna
CI
connected to it, adjust the audio gain
(R15) for a comfortable level and operate
T the r -f gain control (R/8) so that the re-
ceived signal does not overload the receiver.
VI RI5 T2 V2 S2 T3 I Riß
To use the transmitter and tuner together,
you can interlock the standby switches.
1974 Spring Edition 61
USEFUL TECHNIQUE TO MAKE
PROFESSIONAL-LIKE PRINTED CIRCUITS
BY ROBERT A. SULLIVAN & ROBERT S. BRODSKY

MAKING your own printed circuit board supply of sensitized PC board blanks (see
has never been a particularly easy job; Table II). There are three types available.
but the rewards of doing so are great. You Epoxy fiberglass has the best electrical and
save time and money; and you get a real feel-
ing of satisfaction from having accomplished Fig. 1. Reproduction of printed page
the task. Not, of course that it's all that diffi- shows how patterns are presented in
cult. A number of kits for making PC boards magazine, making the first step easy.
are available commercially-varying as to the
degree of complexity involved in the tech-
nique and the quality of the final result.
It is not always necessary, however, to
have a complicated layout to make a good
PC board. Described here is a technique
that combines many of the best features of
different kit manufacturers. The non -camera
photographic technique (generally agreed
upon as the best approach) requires a mini-
mum investment in equipment and is vir-
tually "goof-proof."
The procedure involves five basic steps:
laying out the etching guide, making a film
positive of the layout, making a negative of
the positive, printing the negative pattern on
,N« ,.I...
bee « you .e re1.
a sensitized PC board blank, and etching and are tee wü uv, Wen 164N Watt

drilling the board. The procedure is much less

complicated than it sounds and you will be
able to make a commercial -quality hoard on
your first try.

Basic Materials Needed. Before you can

begin making a printed circuit board, you teeth, e,th ttheI. . lay" nacre. nere, te[trm pm 1 awl ttin It 1ät peme-
must have on hand a few basic items. Table ltnll die imp Wks lm.l lance
prw kt -ne the lamp e e.N.,,lteterm u
nent Work ink,
wile the lamp. lneallet *Mae oar red of
mhu L .q tie. .qJ.} . u h. :.b..nol ed reek leach Iu the erme., greed eacta p.d
I lists the most important. In addition, not
h
ete u...m.p.. o.mA.I m ha .t tle. member m the ),at peüera. The,, Icecap, em rorebl,
TaÍ...milw the Fngt rol.ke the filler leale b* thee reape.L" cackler
listed in Table I but a basic necessity is a , in t_ melealm the ptdt teal ate reaureted h, tal trwá2mn.

62 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 mechanical properties, but it is also the most
0
expensive by a wide margin. Polyester boards
can yield electrical properties as good as the Ole
epoxy -fiberglass type, but they tend to warp OO
-a difficulty which can be overcome by stor-
ing them flat. The phenolic board is the
least expensive. It is adequate for all but the
most critical projects. Its tendency to chip
during drilling (which applies to the poly-
ester board to a lesser degree) can be
circumvented by careful and patient work.
For almost all projects, a 1/16" -thick board
blank with 1 -ounce copper cladding on one
° o
side will suffice. Buy fairly large board
blanks, which cost less per square inch.
A photo reversing kit (such as the one
from Kepro) is needed to make the film nega-
tive. The kit generates a total of 480 square Fig. 2. Typical pattern on plastic
sheet. Remaining lines must be added.
inches of film negative for about $7.00. Film
and developer are available separately. (The the developer. Cotton swabs with long
developer supplied with the photo reversing wooden handles are a must. They are re-
kit is expensive, however 70% methyl-NOT quired for developing the film negative, and
propyl-alcohol works just as well and costs the handles can be used to lift the board out
considerably less.) Very carefully read and of the etchant.
follow all instructions which you will find on A black ink designed for touching up pho-
a sheet packed with the film. tographic film can be used to correct layout
You will also need a solution for develop- errors on the film negative. And for errors
ing the exposed PC board. Purchase this in caught before the board is etched, you should
gallon quantities if you plan on doing a lot of have on hand a supply of rub -on resist and
PC work. a bottle of paint -on resist for corrections.
Etchant is used to remove the unwanted Finally, you will need No's. 60 and 67,1/lß',
copper from the developed board blank. This and 'é' drills, all of them high-speed
solution contains ferric chloride which per- types. The No. 67 drill is particularly useful
manently stains virtually anything it touches for drilling IC lead holes.
and corrodes most metals. Handle it with
care. Again, buy by the gallon. Step -By -Step Procedure. You will most
Layout materials come next. They include likely be interested, at least at first, in dupli-
self -adhering black dots and black tape, dry- cating an actual size PC board from a maga-
transfer decals which can be used to title zine etching guide. In this case, the hard job
and number component locations on the of laying out the conductor pattern ( see Fig.
board (an option you can do without if you 1) has been done for you. Lay a piece of
are on a tight budget), and sheet acetate for acetate sheet over the etching guide and fix
the layout base. For the latter, select clear, it in place with masking tape or staples. You
untreated acetate in a medium or heavy are now ready to make the film positive.
weight. Begin your layout by pasting solder pads
Kepro recommends that you use a No. 2 on the acetate, matching the dot sizes rea-
photoflood lamp for exposing the negative sonably close as shown in Fig. 2. After all the
and board blank, but if you cannot find this pads are in place, put a piece of paper over
item, a standard 150 -watt reflector lamp, the layout and use the back of a spoon to
available at any drug store, can be substi- burnish them down.
tuted. Add to your shopping list two 9" x Next, use the black crepe tape to intercon-
5;í" x 2" Pyrex dishes, to be used for devel- nect the pads according to the published lay-
oping and etching the board, and a small out, again matching widths. It is also a good
plastic funnel for replacing reusable chemi- idea to make a border with the tape (see
cals in their containers. Fig. 3) to assist in trimming the board after it
Filter paper is an option which can pay for is etched. When positioning the tape strips,
itself in the long run. Use it to periodically allow %G" of width for each 5 amperes of cur-
filter the accumulation of photoresist out of rent they must handle and ?!u" minimum
1974 Spring Edition 63
 asa
alp

j COW

Fig. 3. At the left, the lines and border needed for Fig. 2 have been added
to the plastic sheet. Then negative is made by photographic process (right).
spacing between strips. Burnish down the
strips. TABLE I-MATERIALS REQUIRED
Remove the acetate positive from the lay- Material Cat. No.* Price
out and very carefully compare the two for PC Board Developer
accuracy. A mistake now is difficult to cor- 1 pint D-1PT(K) $1.15
rect later. This done, turn off all fluorescent 1 gallon D-1G(K) 5.50
lighting, if any, in your work area. Place a Etchant (Ferric Chloride)
lamp equipped with a 15 -watt bulb and 1 pint E-1PT(K) 0.85
shade (to diffuse the light) 8 feet or more 1 gallon E-1G(K) 3.50
away from the work area. Turn on the lamp Resist Paint (Black)
and extinguish all other lighting in the room. 1 pint R-1PT(K) 2.25
Photo Reversing Kit FK-701(K) 7.20
From now until you finish developing the
Photo Reversing Film
board, this is the only lighting there should 10" x 24" RF -1024(K) 3.00
be in your work area. 20" x 24" RF -2024(K) 5.40
Open the reversing film container and re- Reversing Film Developer
move the instruction sheet packed inside. 1 pint RFD-1PT(K) 2.25
Carefully read the instructions provided. Layout Pads
Then, remove the reversing film and cut off 250 (0.293 x 0.031) D137(B) 3.00
enough to make your negative. Immediately 250 (0.100 x 0.031) D101(B) 3.00
return the rest of the film to its light -tight 250 (0.156 x 0.031) D103(B) 2.00
IC Pads
container and seal the container with mask-
250 (14 -pin DIP) 6014(B) 7.55
ing tape. Black Tape
Place the reversing film, emulsion side 20 yd (0.125" wide) 1201/.125(B) 0.75
down on a sheet of clear glass. Over this, 20 yd (0.062" wide) T201/.062(6) 0.75
place and center your positive. Complete the 20 yd (0.031" wide) T201/.031(B) 0.75
sandwich with another sheet of glass. If you
:Catalog numbers followed by (K) are available
are using the No. 2 photoflood lamp, expose from Kepro Circuit Systems, Inc., 3630 Scarlet Oak
the negative as instructed. But if your expos- Blvd., St. Louis, MO 63122; those followed by (B)
ing medium is a 150 -watt reflector lamp, ex- are available from Bishop Graphics Inc., 7300 Rad-
posure time will be about 35i minutes at a ford Ave., North Hollywood, CA 91605. Items are
distance of 12 inches. also available from distributors such as Allied
After exposing the film for the recom- Electronics and Newark Electronics.
mended time, shut off the exposing lamp.
64 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 posed edges of the portion to be saved and
TABLE II-BOARD BLANKS return it to its light-tight envelope.
Material Cat. No.* Price Now, sandwich the board (copper side
Phenolic Base up) and film negative between the two sheets
3" x 3" S1-33 $0.58 of glass, and expose the board according to
3" x 6" S1-36 0.90 Kepro's instructions for the No. 2, or for 3l
4" x 6" S1-46 1.06
6" x 6" 1.52
minutes at 12" for the reflector lamp.
S1-66
7" x 10" S1-710 2.72 Pour board developer to a depth of 3&" into
12" x 12" S1-1212 5.36 both Pyrex dishes. Handling it carefully only
Polyester Base by edges, place the board into the developer
3"x3" S1 -33M 0.60 and gently rock the dish back and forth for
3" x 6" S1 -36M 0.94 2 minutes. Still handling it by its edges, re-
4" x 6" 51-46M 1.12 move the board from the dish and lay it on
6" x 6" S1 -66M 1.62 a protected flat surface where the developer
7" x 10" S1 -710M 2.88 on it can evaporate undisturbed. Meanwhile,
12" x 12" S1 -1212M 5.72
Epoxy Base pour the used developer into a non -plastic
3" x 3" S1 -33G 0.84 (preferably glass) container labelled "used
3" x 6" S1 -36G 1.44 developer." Thoroughly rinse the dish.
4" x 6" S1 -46G 1.66 When the board is completely dry, inspect
6" x 6" S1 -66G 2.58 it to see if the developer has done its work.
7" x 10" S1 -710G 4.80 You should be able to see clearly the photo-
12" x 12" S1 -1212G 9.64 resist pattern on the copper. If necessary,
'Kepro Circuit Systems, Inc., 3630 Scarlet Oak place the board into the dish containing the
Blvd., St. Louis, MO 63122.
clean developer and rock the dish for 45
Note: All are 1/16" thick, clad on one side only seconds. Remove the board and again allow it
with 1 -ounce copper with photosensitized resist to dry undisturbed. You can now turn on the
coating. regular lighting in the room. When it has
dried completely, carefully inspect the
Next, use a swab and the film developer to board's resist pattern. Repair any messy or
remove all unwanted emulsion as shown in incomplete areas with rub -on or paint -on re-
Fig. 4. Move the swab back and forth, using sist.
enough developer to keep the film wet. In a The board is now ready to be etched. To
few seconds, the unwanted green coating will do this, pour etchant to a depth of 3&" for
begin to dissolve. Continue swabbing until small and 4"-1" for medium to large boards
all of the exposed emulsion has dissolved; into a Pyrex dish. Float the board, copper side
wash and hang the negative up to dry. down, in the resist. It will take about an hour
If your board blank must be trimmed to for the etchant to completely remove the un-
size before being exposed, sandwich it be- wanted copper, but you should check the
tween two sheets of heavy, opaque paper and progress every 10 or 15 minutes. Do not rinse
seal the edges with masking tape. Then use the board until the entire etching process is
a nibbling tool to trim the blank to size. complete. When the etching process is com-
Immediately seal with masking tape the ex - plete, however, thoroughly rinse the etchant
off under running water. Then remove the
Fig. 4. Remove the exposed emulsion
with a swab and developer solution. resist with fine steel wool and follow up with
a cleaning in soapy water.
Do not try to economize on etchant. Once
used, it should be discarded by pouring it in
a slow, lazy stream down the drain with
plenty of running water. Let the water con-
tinue to run for about 15 seconds after all the
etchant is gone and the dish has been
thoroughly cleaned.
The final steps in fabricating your PC
board are drilling component lead and
mounting holes and trimming to final size. If
desired, you can rub onto the component side
of the board dry -transfer legends to identify
component locations. p
1974 Spring Edition
65
BUILD A SIGNAL
DIFFERENCE
STEREO BALANCE METER
EXACTLY BALANCES
OUTPUTS OF BOTH CHANNELS
FOR PERFECT STEREO

SOUND REPRODUCTION

BY J. R. LAUGHLIN

MOST audiophiles invest considerable ef- ly simplifies the hardware requirements of

fort and money into building their home the Balance Meter. Of course, absolute
stereo systems. Often, however, they are so power measurements are impossible with-
concerned with wide frequency response, out the aid of special calibration proce-
minimum distortion, and good channel sep- dures: but, for any setting of the level
aration, that proper amplitude balance of control, accurate relative variations in audio
stereo channels is overlooked. amplitude will be displayed in dB on the
The "Signal Difference Stereo Balance meter scale.
Meter" described here, when connected to
the stereo system's amplifier outputs, pro- Theory of Circuit Design. As shown in
vides a means of quickly and accurately Fig. 1, T1 is a step-up transformer that
balancing stereo channels and gives a con- boosts the input from the amplifier to pro-
tinuous readout of the various functions of vide a driving signal for MI. This gives the
the stereo signal. The Balance Meter is Balance Meter great sensitivity, even at low
passive and requires no power supply. volume levels, without the need for active
The meter used here is a standard type amplifiers. Level control R1, in series with
commonly found in the broadcasting and re- Mi. permits on -scale readings over a wide
cording industries. The face of the meter has range of volume levels.
two scales: one reading VU (volume units) Function switch Si connects the primary
from -20 to +3: the other showing voltage of TI to the input circuit in the appropriate
percentages from 0 to 100, with 1007 manner to provide four signal configura-
voltage coinciding with the 0 point on the tions for driving the meter movement. In
VU scale. (An internal rectifier drives the the L and the R positions, the primary is
dc meter movement.) The normal level for simply connected to the input selected,
volume units is at 0 VU. while grounding the unwanted input.
Volume units are numerically equal to The L -R is obtained by connecting
the number of decibels above the reference the primary of Ti to both "hot" lead out-
level of mW of power into a 600 -ohm load.
I puts from the amplifier, without completing
The use of an uncalibrated level control the circuit to ground. If the channels con-
and the omission of special circuits to com- tain identical signals, there is no indication
pensate for loads other than 600 ohms great- on Ml. On the other hand, with a stereo
66 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 PARTS LIST
D1,D2-1N91 diode (do not substitute)
Ml-VU meter movement (Calectro No.
D1-930 or similar)
SIA
MI R1 -100,000 -ohm, audio -taper potentiometer
Sl-Double-pole, 4 -position, nonshorting ro-
COM L -R
LtR+ tary switch
1N91
I
Tl-Interstage transistor transformer with
5:1 impedance ratio (Triad T24X, Stancor
(M
IN91
LO-;
TA35, or similar)
Misc.-Chassis box (LMB No. 4.53N or sim-
R
= R
L/ ) ÍÍ
ilar); three -conductor cable; control knobs
(2); spade lugs (3); rubber feet; rubber
IOOK grommet; panel and cabinet finishing ma-
L -R SIB terials; hook-up wire; solder; etc.
LtR*
I
Fig. 1. Circuit of the Balance Meter
is basically a step-up system which
drives meter. Diodes provide isolation.

signal, current will flow through Tl in anode-to -anode or a cathode -to -cathode con-
proportion to the difference signal. figuration. Wiring up SI can be a bit tricky;
The L + R function is derived by con- so, be careful when working on the switch.
necting the primary of Tl to the "hot" After passing the input cable through a
outputs of both amplifier channels and rubber -grommet-lined hole in the rear panel
completing a circuit to ground through of the chassis and connecting it at one end
D1 and D2. Thus, the meter reads a sum to the appropriate lugs on SI, connect and
signal. solder spade lugs to the free ends. The
spade lugs facilitate easy and dependable
Construction. Since the circuit (Fig. 1) connections to the amplifier.
of the Balance Meter is very simple, a As with the front panel, pains should
circuit board and complicated wiring tech- also be taken to make the cover of the
niques are not needed. Balance Meter blend with the rest of your
Begin construction by machining the equipment. You can use contact cement to
front panel of the cabinet to be used so apply a cloth -backed vinyl upholstery mate-
that it will accommodate the meter move- rial to the cover. Then finish up by assem-
ment, function switch, and level control. bling the cabinet and attaching rubber feet
Then carefully finish the panel with a coat to the bottom of the chassis.
of paint or with adhesive -backed vinyl to
complement your present system. This done,
use a dry -transfer lettering kit to apply
the legends for SI and Rl; use black letters
on light backgrounds and white letters on
dark backgrounds. Then, to protect the let-
tering during use, spray a thin coat of clear
Krylon over the entire front panel; allow
to dry. Follow up with another coat or two
of the Krylon. Note: Do not apply one
heavy coat of the Krylon and let it go at
that. A heavy coat will simply dissolve the
lettering.
Now mount the meter movement, switch,
and potentiometer in their respective cut-
outs on the front panel. Referring to both
Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, wire together all com-
ponents and cables. When wiring Ti into
place, remember that the high-impedance
side goes to the meter circuit. The polarities
of Dl and D2 are not important as long as Fig. 2. Components are mounted on lugs
they are connected together either in an of switch, potentiometer, and meter.
1974 Spring Edition 67
 Setup and Use. Preliminary checkout is hot output of the generator, and connect
best accomplished with the aid of an the ground of the generator to the COM
audio generator. But if a generator is not lead. If a zero reading is obtained on Ml
available, you can use one channel of your with this test and all previous checks are
stereo system for the tests. correct, the Balance Meter is ready to use.
First, place SI in the L position and Locate the Balance Meter close to the
connect the L and conk input leads to the amplifier with which it is to be used and
generator's hot and ground outputs, respec- in a position where it can easily be ob-
tively. With the generator turned on, the served. Then connect the input cable to the
VU meter's pointer should deflect, and the appropriate output terminals on the ampli-
deflection should change as you change the fier. (Note: In some amplifiers, especially
setting of the level control. those which provide speaker phase switch-
With Rl fully clockwise, the most sensi- ing for one of the channels, use of the
tive position. the signal level required for Balance Meter is not recommended. To
full-scale deflection of the meter pointer determine whether or not it is safe to use
should be less than 0.4 volt rms. This the Balance Meter with your amplifier,
signal should also be read on the VU study the amplifier's schematic diagram; if
meter with SI set to L + R. (It may be the outputs share a common reference line
slightly less due to the drop across DI.) -and only if they do-it is safe to use this
Repeat the above procedure with the instrument.)
Balance Meter's R and coM inputs con- With the Balance Meter properly in-
nected to the generator's hot and ground stalled, readings should be obtained on Ml
outputs and Si set to R. Check also to see with the function switch in the L, R. and
that the signal is read in the t. + R posi- L + R positions. A stereo signal will pro-
tion of SI. Here, again, a slight reduction
may be noticed as a result of the voltage
vide readings in the L - R position. To
exactly balance the amplifier, switch to the
drop across D2. mono mode so that identical program mate-
To check out the L - R function, place rial is fed into each channel. Rotate the
Si in the L - R position and ground the R balance control on the amplifier to a posi-
input lead to com. A reading should be tion where the VU meter nulls to the left
obtained with the generator connected be- index of the scale.
tween the L and conk input leads. Likewise, Now, adjust Rl fully clockwise to obtain
the same reading should be obtained with maximum sensitivity. At maximum sensi-
the L input lead grounded to coca and the tivity, it might be difficult to obtain a per-
generator connected between the R and fect null, especially if the volume level is
cotes input leads. Now, tie the L and R fairly high. Differences in bass or treble
input leads together, connect them to the response in each channel will cause small
deflections of All. Some amplifiers incor-
porate separate clutched controls for bass
and treble adjustments. In these amplifiers,
adjust the controls to obtain the best pos-
sible null. If your amplifier has a switch to
take the controls out of the system to pro-
vide a flat response, put the switch in the
flat position.
When using a tape playback deck or
record player with the amplifier, precise
balance of the entire system can be ob-
tained by use of a full -track prerecorded
test tape or a test record that produces
equal output amplitude on each channel.
As the tape or record is being played, first
switch the amplifier to mono and balance
it as outlined above. Then switch to the
stereo mode and adjust the tape recorder
Mark S1 positions to agree with cir- balance control for best possible null. This
cuit wiring. Finish front panel to co- will balance the system from the tape heads
ordinate with other system components. or pickup cartridge forward. O
68 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Why a Sylvania home training
program may be your best
investment for a rewarding
career in electronics

In the Master TV, Radio Servicing Program,

you build and keep the all solid-state
black and white TV set, the color TV set, the
oscilloscope and multimeter shown above.

LEADER IN ELECTRONICS
1 TRAINING
6 HANDS-ON TRAINING
To give practical application to your studies, a
Over the years, Sylvania Resident Schools have variety of valuable kits are included in many
trained thousands of men and women for key programs. In Sylvania's Master TV/Radio Ser-
positions in the electronics field. Now, through vicing Program, you will actually build and keep
Sylvania Home Training, you can receive the an all solid-state black and white TV set, and a
same high -quality career training at home. In your color TV set. You also construct an oscilloscope
spare time. While you hold your present job. which is yours to keep and use on the job.

LICENSE TRAINING MONEY

AUTOTEXT TEACHES YOU
2ELECTRONICS RAPIDLY, EASILY. T FCC
BACK AGREEMENT
AUTOTEXT, offered exclusively by Sylvania, is
the proven step-by-step method of home training
rthat can help you learn the basics of electronics
Take
Program -
Sylvania's Communications Career
or enter with advanced standing and
prepare immediately for your 1st, 2nd, or3rd class
quickly and easily. FCC Radio Telephone License examinations.
Our money -back agreement assures you of your
money back if you take, and fail to pass, the FCC
3CASSETTE SYSTEM examination taken within 6 months after com-
This innovative learning -by -hearing approach is pleting the course.
a special option that adds an extra dimension to
AUTOTEXT. It's almost like having an instructor $CONVENIENT PAYMENT PLANS
in your own home. As you play thecassette tapes,
you'll have an instructor guiding you through You get a selection of tuition plans. And, thereare
your AUTOTEXT lessons. Explaining the material never any interest or finance charges.
as you read it. All in an easy -to -understand, con-
versational tone. r SYLVANIA TECHNICAL SCHOOL,
Sylvania Technical Systems. Inc
4SPECIALIZED ADVANCED TRAINING Home Study
909 Third Avenue
If you're already working in electronics or you New York. N Y 10022
Please send me FREE illustrated career catalog understand that
have previous training, you can start on a higher am under no obligation
I I

level without wasting time on work you already

know. Name

Address

5 THROUGHOUT
PERSONAL SUPERVISION
City

All during your program of home study, your ex- State Zip
ams are reviewed and your questions are

®
Age
answered by Sylvania instructors who become Veterans: Check here D 222.402n
personally involved in your efforts and help you
over any "rough spots" that may develop.
SYLVANIA
CIRCLE NO. 9 ON READER SERVICE CARD
1974 Spring Edition 71
BUILD A very nonlinear voltage scale. For reasonable
linearity at low cost, a wirewound pot must
be used. For a small enclosure, be sure to

ZENER DIODE use the miniature VW -type Mallory poten-

tiometer given in the Parts List to leave
enough room for the battery.

SUBSTITUTION Theory of Operation. The circuit is a

high -gain Darlington amplifier, with a neg-
ative bias supply which normally keeps the
6OX SIMULATES A ZENER transistors in their nonconducting state. The
bias is varied by R2 from 1.2 to 18 volts.
DIODE FROM 1.2 TO Note that one end of the bias supply ( the
18 VOLTS WITH POWER DISSIPATION
wiper arm of R2) is connected to Q2's base,
while the other end is connected to one of
TO SIX WATTS BY STANLEY SULA the input terminals. Thus, the voltage across
the input terminals is bucked by the bias
voltage so that, as long as the bias exceeds
experimenters are aware of the the input, the net voltage on Q2 is negative
MOST
zener diode's usefulness and versatility. and the transistors do not conduct. How-
However, the fact that a single zener diode ever, as soon as the positive input exceeds
can provide only one value of zener voltage the negative bias by 1.2 volts, the transistors
is a characteristic which may discourage ex-
turn on and present a very low resistance
perimentation with this very useful device. between the input terminals.
The trouble of buying a new diode every Transistors Q1 and Q2 will not conduct
time a different voltage is required in an ex- until a positive voltage of 0.6 appears across
perimental circuit can be quite expensive each of their emitter -base junctions. This
and frustrating. sets the minimum of 1.2 volts for the lowest
The Zener Diode Substitution Box de- zener voltage attainable with this circuit.
scribed here is a very worthwhile project for
those who experiment with circuits involv-
ing zener diodes. The substitution box pro-
vides a continuously variable zener break-
down from approximately 1.2 to 18 volts,
with a power dissipation of up to six watts.
Using all new parts, it can be constructed
easily for less than $10. The device's elec-
trical characteristics are identical to those
of a high -quality zener diode.

Construction. Due to the simplicity of

the circuit (Fig. 1), point-to-point wiring
Fig. 1. Darlington amplifier switches
can be used. Parts layout is not critical. The on when voltage at the input bucks
maximum power dissipation of the circuit out preset bias. With proper heat
varies from 3i watt to 6 watts, depending on sink on Q1, dissipation can be 6 watts.
whether or not Ql is provided with a heat
sink. With no heat sink, maximum dissipa- PARTS LIST
tion is approximately Ji watt. With a "slip-
on" fin -type heat sink, dissipation is about 1 RI -22l2 -volt battery (Eveready #112)
DI -1-A. 50 -volt diode (HEP154)
watt; and for six watts, a heavy-duty heat 1)2-18 -volt zener diode (HEPZ2522)
sink is necessary. Q1-Transistor (HEP243)
If power dissipation is to be no more than Q2-Transistor (HEP53)
1 watt, the unit can be built in a 4" X 274" R1 -1500 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
R2 -25,000 -ohm, 5 -watt wirewound potentio-
X 132" plastic enclosure. For a higher dissi- meter (Mallory VW -25K)
pation, a larger enclosure will be required. R3 -2700 -ohm, 1 -watt resistor
Do not use a carbon -composition poten- SI-Spst slide switch
tiometer for R2. Even the so-called "linear 11isc. Enclosure. 5 -lug terminal strip,
heat sink (see text), knob, battery holder
taper" potentiometers of this type can be (Keystone #177). hardware, etc.
grossly nonlinear and their use can lead to a
72 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Diode Dl simulates the forward charac- 92011
I/2W
teristics of a zener diode and also protects Z ENER
0-25V SUB.
QI and Q2 from reverse polarity voltages. 24V
Box

Calibration. The calibration circuit is ó

shown in Fig. 2. The voltmeter should be Fig. 2. To calibrate the dial on R2.
capable of measuring down to one volt accu- use dc voltmeter capable of indicat-
rately. Turn the voltage -selector dial (R2) ing down to about 1 volt accurately.
on the substitution box fully clockwise
with any such diode, when connecting it
( minimum resistance) This should give a
.
into a circuit, always be sure that there is
meter reading close to 1.2 volts. Slowly turn sufficient series resistance to prevent ex-
the dial until the meter reads 2 volts. Make ceeding the power dissipation limits. This
a graduation mark on the dial at this point.
minimum series resistance can be calculated
Continue rotating the dial until the meter from the formula R=E,,E,,/P, where R is
indicates 3 volts and make another dial
the minimum series resistance, E, is the
marking. Continue until you reach the high-
zener voltage, E,, is the difference between
est attainable voltage. This maximum volt-
the zener voltage and the source voltage,
age will be between 18 and 20 volts, de-
and P is the maximum power dissipation in
pending on the exact value of D2. To watts.
complete the dial marking at the lower end, Needless to say, switch Si should be
make a mark for 1 volt a distance below 2
volts that is approximately the average of
turned off when the unit is not in use,
the distance between other voltage mark-
though the battery drain is only about 2.5
mA. Incidentally, with SI turned off, the
ings.
device acts as a 1.2 -volt zener regardless of
Operation. Since the circuit of the substi- the setting of the voltage dial. However, the
tution box duplicates the characteristics of a zener voltage knee in this case is not as
zener diode so closely, it is used exactly as abrupt as it is with the switch on and the
you would use a regular zener diode. As voltage dial set to 1.2 volts. O

The Mark Ten B Capacitive Discharge

Ignition System keeps your car in tune
... and everyone knows that a well -tuned
car gets better mileage, requires less
maintenance, runs longer and better,
and helps in the quest for o
cleaner air. ó
 One Second
METRONOME TIMER
VISIBLE AND AUDIBLE INDICATIONS FOR YOUR DARKROOM

BY A. A. MANGIERI

ONE THOUSAND AND ONE . . . one accomplish this, the timer provides an
thousand and two . . . one thousand audible "click" and a simultaneous flash
and three . . . that's the familiar method of light every second. All you do is count
of counting off the seconds for camera and the number of clicks and/or flashes.
enlarger exposures when a mechanical or
electrical timer is not available. This meth- How it Works. Transistor Ql, in Fig. 1,
od is not very accurate. For example, if is a Motorola HEP S9001 "programmable"
you are in a big hurry, your count may unijunction transistor or PUT, a special
speed up; or if you are tired, it may slow type of SCR. The anode gate (AG) of QI
down. What you really need is a timer that is at a voltage determined by voltage di-
is insensitive to emotions and fatigue. vider resistors R4 and R5. When Si is
The photographer's visual/audio One - closed, Ql is initially in the non-conducting
Second Metronome Timer fills the bill. It state.
paces your second count so that your film Voltage at anode A begins to build up
and paper exposures can be uniform. To as timing capacitor Cl charges up through

74 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 C2
-1051F
RI R4
2.2K 3.8K

QI AG
R6 R5
5K 15K

II

R3
3.311
SI
C3
.05pF
+ BI
9V

-
82
9V

CI

Fig. 1. Circuit is essentially a relaxation oscillator using a programmable

UJT or PUT. The turns ratio between the low -impedance winding (connected
to the UJT cathode lead) and the high -impedance winding (connected to
neon lamp) of Ti causes lamp to flash with each audible "tick" of speaker.

PARTS LIST
81,B2 -9-volt battery SI-Spst slide or toggle switch
C1 -125-µF, 35 -voltelectrolytic capacitor S2-Spdt slide or toggle switch
C2,C3-0.05-µF disc capacitor SPKR-3.2-ohm, 2%"-square speaker
D1 -1 -ampere, 200 -volt silicon diode (Moto- TI-B-watt universal speaker transformer;
rola HEP-156 or similar) 2000-14,000 ohm push-pull plate to voice
11-NE-51H high -intensity neon lamp coil (Allied Electronics 6W15HFL or simi-
Q1-PUT (HEP S9001 or similar) lar)
R1 -2200 -ohm Misc.-Dialco No. 95-9110 lamp socket with
R2--1.8-ohm all resistors red dome, less resistor for 11; 41/2" x 31/4"
R3 -3.3 -ohm 1/ -watt x 3" aluminum chassis box; perforated
R4 -3800 -ohm phenolic board and push -in solder termi-
R5-I5,000-ohm nals; rubber feet; hardware; hookup wire;
R6 -5000 -ohm potentiometer (Clarostat Type solder; etc.
U39, or similar)

timing resistors Rl and R6. When the volt- age across Cl drops to a low level and Ql
age at the anode builds up to slightly more ceases to conduct. The cycle then repeats
than the voltage at AG, Ql goes suddenly itself as long as S1 is closed.
into conduction and allow Cl to discharge Resistors R4 and R5 set the QI stand-
rapidly through TI and the speaker's voice off ratio and valley current for high cir-
coil. cuit efficiency. Capacitor C2 is an r.f. or
The sudden discharge of Cl through noise bypass to prevent premature turn -
Tl generates a high -voltage spike across on of Ql by nearby electrical interfer-
the secondary of the transformer, briefly ence. Switch S2 provides ru and Lo level
lighting 11. Diode Dl and capacitor C3 audio selection.
enhance the brightness of the lamp's glow
and the duration of the flash. The speaker Construction. It is imperative that a
produces an audible click simultaneously metal case be used to house the timer
with the flash of Il. circuit to shield it thoroughly from elec-
As each click and flash occur, the volt- trical noise pickup. A 412' X 334" X 3"
1974 Spring Edition 75
 aluminum chassis box easily accommodates
all parts.
First perforate the front of the box with
a ',4" drill (or cut out a 2.1" opening and
use a screen grille) for the speaker. Then
determine how and where you plan to
mount each part and assembly, and ma-
chine the box accordingly. A suggested
layout is shown in Figs. 2 and 3.
Start assembly by mounting Tl and the
battery clamp on the rear wall of the box.
Then mount the components on a 23_" X
234" piece of perforated phenolic board with
push -in terminals, and bolt the board in
place.
Mount the lamp socket, switches, and
speaker in their respective locations on the Fig. 3. Most of small components
front of the box. Wire together all com- can be mounted on perf board.
ponents, referring to Fig. 1. Make sure
that the leads of C3 and Dl in the high -
voltage secondary side of TI do not touch Transistor QI can be substituted by any
other wires or components. Lengths of :30- to 40 -volt PUT rated at 150-200 mA
plastic tubing slipped over these leads will forward current. Carefully identify the A,
prevent accidental short circuits. AG, and K leads. If the PUT refuses to
When the circuit is completely assem- fire, increase the value of R4. Transformer
bled, set R6 for about mid -range. Set SI Ti may be replaced by any universal 8-
to ON and listen for the click and observe watt tube -type output transformer with
the brightness of the flashes, with S2 set secondary taps. Use the full secondary
in the LO position. If the click is too loud winding at first and shift to lower taps to
or the flash level is too bright, you can increase audio output.
omit battery 132 and operate the circuit
on only one 9 -volt battery. In either posi- Calibration and Use. With the circuit
tion of S2, if the Hash level is not bright operating, use an electric clock with a
enough, try reversing the diode. Use the sweep second hand to adjust R6 until you
connection that provides the brightest flash. hear ten clicks and see ten flashes in ex-
Also, if you prefer an audio -off position, actly ten seconds. This is all there is to
omit R2. calibration, and you can now assemble
the metal box.
Use the timer to pace your count for
both timed camera and enlarger exposures.
With a few practice runs, you will quickly
acquire the knack of operating the camera
cable release or enlarger switch at exactly
the right moment.
If you incorporated the audio-off fea-
ture and have the timer set in this posi-
tion when working in your darkroom, pace
your count by lamp flashes, and rely on
that pace because you might miss a lamp
flash between eye blinks.
You can expect considerable battery life
due to the low drain circuit of the metro-
nome timer. As a rule of thumb, replace
the batteries when either the audio or
light output drops below your preferences;
Fig. 2. If you arrange the components proper- the count rate is affected very little by bat-
ly, they will easily fit within small chassis. tery aging. Also, recheck the count rate
Metal is used to prevent external noise from occasionally and adjust R6 if needed to com-
false triggering of UJT, causing timing errors. pensate for any long-term change in Cl
76 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Ake?),
0<0
OF

Build a LOW-COST
LOGIC PROBE WITH MEMORY*
REVEALS TTL OR DTL LOGIC STATES
AND LOW -DUTY -CYCLE PULSES
BY H. H. ROSS and T. R. MUELLER
Instrumentation and Adranred Methodology, A nab (. heodstn Dir.. Dak IC idjr \nNonal Luhoruton.
iral

OFTEN have you wished for a clear indication of its presence even if the
HOvV logic -level indicator that would not only pulse width is as short as 10 nsec.
reveal high and low TTL or DTL logic :3. For every low -duty -cycle pulses, a
states, but would also capture those fleeting memrnv can be activated that will indicate
low -duty -cycle pulses that are difficult to see indefinitely that a level transition has occur-
even with a high -quality scope. Would you red and this memory can be programmed to
also like your indicator to have a memory respond to only positive -going or negative -
circuit that would tell you if a transition has going pulses or both.
occurred even in your absence:' The \IEsr- Comparable commercial logic -level indi-
o-PROBE shown in photo above will do all of cators without the memory feature cost as
this and more. much as $100. However, for about 2 hours
With only four inexpensive IC packages of time and S6 worth of parts, you can con-
and a few other standard components, all struct a high -quality test instrument that
of the following measurement modes can be will troubleshoot virtually any TTL or DTL
implemented. circuit.
1. A circuit point can be checked for a
high or low logic level. How It Works. The logic and wiring dia-
2. A high or low going pulse will give a gram for the probe is shown in Fig. 1. Main
power for the probe is "stolen" from the
device under test. Maximum load of the
whole probe assembly is about 100 mA and
*Research on this project was sponsored by the U.S. ttorni,
Energy Commission under contract with I )lion Cnrhide Corp. most power supplies can stand this addition -
1974 Spring Edition 77
 RI
ILIA
R2
ICIB
LED
HIGH
INl
01 Óy0
14 11 ' 10

IC3
,4

R4 3
47011
MEMORY IC2C
SLOPE
SELECT 9 S
SI
+SV 14 íC1,2,3,4 +5v
4
IC2D
COMMONo-PIN 7 ICI,2,3,4
R5 LED3
47011 MEMORY
S2
MEMORY
SET

IC4

14 II

R3 C2
39K 10yF
12
IC IC LED 2
LOW

Fig. 1. Logic and wiring diagram for the "Mem-O-Probe." Use of

four inexpensive IC's and standard parts makes this a real "bargain."
PARTS LIST SI-Spdt, center -oft, switch
S2-Spst, normally open push-button switch
RI-Selected (see text) ICI, IC2-SN7400
R2, R3-39,000 ohm, 1/4 W res. IC3, 1C4-SN74121
R4, R5-470 ohm, 1/4 W res. LEDI, LED2, LED3-11V5023 (or equivalent)
R6-1000 ohm, 14 W res. QI -2N3819 (or equivalent)
Cl, C2-10 µF, 10 V electrolytic capacitor Misc. Perf board, terminal pin jacks, small
case.

al drain. However, if loading is a problem, IC1B is low, the output of IC1B is high,
an external 5 -volt supply can be used with and LEDI will be on, indicating a high
common of the probe connected to common level. Since the signal at gate ICIC is in-
of the device under test. The probe test in- verted, the output of IC1D will be low and
put represents only one TTL load to the LED2 will be off. When the probe is con-
point being checked. QI is an FET that is nected to a logic "0", the states of ICl will
connected as a current limiter to the input be reversed and LED1 will be off and
of gate IC1A and provides over-voltage LED2 will be on.
protection on the input of the gate of at For pulse observation, we must look at
least ± 30 volts. Gate IC1A serves as an the operation of IC3 and IC4. Assume that
input buffer for the probe and also gives an the input is connected to a "low" and LEDI
inverted level at the input of gate /C/ C. IC3 is off. The input to IC3 is high but will
and IC4 are monostable multivibrators. trigger if the input goes low (IC3 is enabled
When not triggered, the Q outputs of these when switch Si does not ground pin 5).
devices are high; upon receiving a nega- When a high -going pulse occurs at the probe
tive -going trigger signal, the Q output goes input, pins 3 and 4 of IC3 momentarily go
low for a time determined by R and C (in low and triggering of the Q output oc-
the case of the MEM-O-PROBE about 300 curs. Q stays low for 300 msec. When Q is
msec) . low, LEDs, the high indicator, will light for
When the input is connected to a logic 300 msec regardless of the state of the probe
"1" (or left unconnected), pin 4 of gate input or of how fast the input pulse occurs.
78 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Interior view of the circuit board and interconnections to front panel.
No PC board is required since the IC's can be interconnected directly.

When the probe input is originally high and orators and cause the R -S flip-flop to reset
a low -going pulse occurs, IC4 will operate and extinguish LED3. This indication will
in a similar fashion to flash the low indicator remain until S2 is pushed again. SI is used
for 300 msec. Thus, both high -and low - to select the particular type of transition that
going pulses are easily seen. The outputs of you are looking for. The probe will respond
IC3 and IC4 override any condition at the to pulses of either polarity when SI is in the
probe input for a fixed time. center position as noted above. If SI is
Using only ICI, IC3, and IC4, one can moved so as to ground pin 5 of 1C3, only
detect both dc levels and very fast pulses at 1C4 will be enabled and the memory will re-
the probe input. However, for very low - spond only to a low level going high. Con-
duty-cycle pulses, it is somewhat tiresome versely, grounding pin 5 of 1C4 causes only
to stare at the level indicators waiting for a a high level going low to trigger the memory.
300-msec pulse, especially if the rep rate is
on the order of 5 or 10 minutes! IC2 is wired Construction Tips. No printed -circuit
as a memory circuit that neatly circumvents board has been laid out for this project since
this problem. When the memory switch, S2, interconnection of the IC packages is rela-
is pushed, the R -S flip-flop (gates 1 C2C and tively simple. A general-purpose board was
IC2D) turns on LED3. If S1 is in the "cen- used in our version. Lead dress and length
ter -off" position, IC3 and 1C4 are both en- are not critical. Power terminals, input ter-
abled and a pulse of either polarity at the minal, switches S1 and S2, and the LED's
probe input will trigger one of the multivi- are mounted on the front panel of our probe
(page 77) which is housed in a 3" X 3" X
1" aluminum box. An interior view of the cir-
of ADJUST FOR 2mA
5K +
cuit board and interconnections to the front
panel are shown above. The ingenious
experimenter will think of numerous other
ways to conveniently package the probe.
The only component that requires selec-
tion in the MEM-O-PROBE is resistor RI; Fig.
5v 2 illustrates how this is done. Connect the
circuit as shown in the diagram making sure
that the 5K pot is set for maximum resis-
Fig. 2. Circuit for selecting resistor tance. Slowly adjust the pot until a reading
R1. Refer to text for the procedure. of 2 mA is indicated on the meter. Remove
1974 Spring Edition 79
 DID THIS
~PULSE OCCUR ?
0
I SET SI TO CENTER POSITION
2 SET MEMORY S2,LED 3 ON
3 LED 3 OFF INDICATES PULSE

0
Fig. 3. Pulses reveal how probe's
memory function is used. Refer
to the article for complete details.
- DID THIS
PULSE OCCUR?
I SET SI TOJ (POSITIVE GOING)
2 SET MEMORY S2,LED 3 ON
0 I 3 LED 3 OFF INDICATES PULSE

I SET SI TO Z (NEGATIVE GOING)

2 SET MEMORY S2,LED 3 ON
3 LED 3 OFF INDICATES PULSE
0

the pot and measure its resistance with an out. Momentarily ground the input and ob-
ohmmeter. Use the closest standard -value serve the low indicator flash no matter how
fixed resistor for RI in your probe. (Note: if fast you ground the input. Push S2 and
QI is ever changed, the value of RI must be check to see that LED3 comes on. Ground
redetermined.) The exact value of RI is not the input to turn off LED3. If all of the
critical, however. above tests check out, your probe is working
The use of LED indicators simplifies the properly. If not, recheck your connections.
design of the probe since drivers for incan- It's simple to use this probe. To check for
descent lamps are not required. Anode and/ a high or low logic level, simply touch the
or cathode markings on the LED's depend probe input to the point under test and ob-
on the individual manufacturer. If you do serve the level indicators. When both in-
not know the orientation of your particular dicators are on, the test point is switching
units, there is a safe and easy way to check between high and low levels continuously at
them. Take a VOM that uses a 1.5-V bat- a rate faster than 300 msec. The indicators
tery for the ohms circuit and set it for the will flash alternately when the switching
X 10 ohms position. Connect the LED to the rate is slower than 300 msec. By holding the
VOM leads. The LED will glow when the probe on a point, the presence of any pulse
anode is connected to the positive ohms lead. will cause one of the indicators to flash if
Make sure you know which probe lead is the pulse width is 10 nsec or longer.
positive; configurations will vary among Fig. 3 illustrates how to use the memory
makes of VOM's. We used red emitting di- function. The pulses that occur in the top
odes in our prototype. However, yellow and two waveforms have both positive -going
green diodes are also available and may be and negative -going transitions. Thus, Si can
used if desired. be in any position to register the pulses in
the memory. In the lower waveforms we
Testing and Using Your Probe. After con- want to discriminate against the first level
struction, check your solder connections and change but still detect the pulse. For the top
wiring against Fig. 1. If everything looks one we set Si to respond only to a low going
okay, perform the following tests. Leave the high and for the lower a high going low.
input disconnected and connect the power The status of the memory indicator will
terminals to a +5 -volt source. The high- clearly reveal the presence or absence of
level indicator should light. Connect the in- the pulse in question. One important note:
put to common; the low-level indicator When you are not using the memory func-
should come on and the high indicator tion, always place switch Si in the center
should extinguish. Put switch Si into the position. This will enable both multi -vibra-
center position and momentarily lift the in- tors so that normal "pulse -catching" will oc-
put from common; the high indicator should cur for positive- and negative-going signals.
flash for about 300 msec (3í sec) no matter The MENT -o -PROBE can become a valuable
how fast you break and make the connec- addition to your test bench. You will come
tion. Disconnect the probe input-the to rely on it more often than a scope when
"high" will come on and the "low" will go troubleshooting digital circuits. 4
BO ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 HEADS 'n' TAILS
ELECTRONIC COIN FLIPPER GIVES YOU A FAIR SHAKE
BY DON LANCASTER

M OST ELECTRONIC games that, in provide a truly random 50-50 long-term re-
effect, flip a coin are designed to give sult.
"the house" an advantage-not so the In the first JK flip-flop only the direct
"Heads 'n' Tails." It's strictly on the up - inputs (clear and preset) are used so that
and-up with an exact 50-50 percentage, the circuit squares up and follows the pow-
unless the circuit is tampered with. The er line frequency as long as S2 is closed.
project is ideal for school laboratories as a
probability demonstrator or study aid. It is
also good for a science fair project-or sim-
ply as a means of determining who buys on
the next coffee break.
The simple circuit, shown Ui Fig. 1,
uses a transistor -transistor -logic IC and four
low-cost transistors. The visual readout of
the second flip-flop indicates heads or tails.
Rather than using an astable, or some
other potentially unsymmetrical "odds de -
terminator," the Heads 'n' Tails counts the
power line frequency so that both the
length of time the pushbutton is held down The power supply is a conventional
and the phase of the power at the instant two-diode, full -wave rectifier and
the pushbutton is depressed combine to filter mounted on the bottom plate.
1974 Spring Edition 81
 II I2
HEADS TAILS

ICI=MC 7476

CLEAR
h'

31
4 15 11
J 0 J 81 Q I

6
C ICI C ICI 02
16 14 12 10 2N5139
K 0 0
¡I
R3
IK PRESET
-MNJM.
03 04
2N5139 2N5139
R4
IK

R5

N400:
+5V

C4 C3
T2500pF T.05pF
117 VAC 02
IN400E

H
PARTS LIST
C1 -47-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor Q1,Q2-2N5139 transistor
C2 -0.1-µF, 10-volt disc ceramic capacitor Q3,Q4-2N5129 transistor
C3-O.5-µF, 10 -volt disc ceramic capacitor R1 -R6-1000 -ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor
C4 -2500-µF, 10-volt electrolytic capacitor SI-Spst slide
or toggle switch
D1,D2-1N4001 (or similar) rectifier diode S2-Normally open spst pushbutton switch
ICI-Dual JK flip-flop (Motorola MC7476 or TI-Transformer; secondary: 6.3 to 8 VCT
Texas Instruments SN7476) at 500 mA
11,12 -5 -volt, 50 -mA lamp (one green, one Ilisc.-Suitable chassis, line cord, strain re-
red) lief, mounting hardware, etc.
Fig. 1. The flip-flops count the power -line frequency when S2 is held
down. The state of the flip-flops is then indicated by the pilot lights.

Transistors Q3 and Q4 alternately set and flip-flop outputs to drive the lamps. When
reset the flip-flop immediately after each S2 is closed, both lamps cycle on and off
sequential power line zero crossing. The 30 times a second-a speed much faster
Q output of the first JK is a noise -free than the eye can follow, to discourage
square wave when S2 is closed, and either cheating.
a logic 1 or 0 when the switch is open.
The output of the first flip-flop is used Construction. Although any construction
to cycle the second JK which is connected technique can be used, a printed circuit
as a binary divider. One of its outputs board such as that used in the prototype
drives the "Heads" indicator lamp, and the is recommended. A foil pattern and compo-
other drives the "Tails" lamp. Transistors nent layout are shown in Fig. 2. Note that
Ql and Q2 provide sufficient power for the one juniper is used on the component side
82 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 WHISTLE SWITCH
Solid-state, w/amplifier mike. Turns light on, radios. etc. by
high-pitched sound from whistle. $1.35.
MEMORY CORE FRAME
Ultra -small memory, wired 1024 cores, measures only 2x2
$6.00 per frame or wired stack with 9 frames and diode
matrix $50.00. Made for RCA.
PANELESCENCE
Flat panel 3t/t x /a in. wide. Apply 117 AAC and it glows
hostly green, weird and unusual light of future. 3'$1.00.
3 LED's for $1.00
I. ight emitting dindes w.'menmry cell for in.tal t test.
UNDERWATER MIKE
\\ aterproof underwater mike from gos't contract. Listen
to ships, fish, underwater noises. etc. $0.50

CRYSTAL PHONE 25t

Brand new, hearing a type. Only 250 each in lots of 4/.ZI.
COMPLETE MEMORY SYSTEM $150
Measures 127 x 1 inches. Utilizes TTL IC's, 10204 memory cores.
x
9 installed sense amps, addressed as 102.1 locations. I/O lines
include 9 data -in, 9 data -out, 10 address -in, powering status
and control. Only 40 systems on hand. Schematics included.

Ct+ R4
K
J
NC
HEADS II
-1/C11 $150 pp

C2 iR1R2`/
C2--:3-
1I
H
+SV
ß
TAIL I2
+5VS
NC
AUTOMOBILE REVERE $7.00
Brand new fully a..rm Lied, grad) to install in your car to give
F NC 3rd dimension concert hall effect. Complete with instructions,
JUMPERrks,IC, R3 rear seat speaker, grill, wires, plugs. =05 $7.00
E NC
O NC
C NC 8 TRACK STEREO TAPE DECK $14.00
G!p TO GND With built-in stereo pre -amp, 115 volt drive motor, channel in-
k
d5 -.--_
B
-A-
TO 60 Hz 180° REF VIA PBI
TO 60 Hz 0° REF
dicator lamps. Unused, original boxed, less cabinet. Customize
your stereo music center with one of these lape decks.
#46 $14.00
Please odd postage for above.

Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern and JOHN MESHNA JR.

component installation. The edge con- PO Box 62, E. LYNN, MASS. 01904
nector is used to facilitate removal. CIRCLE NO. 11 ON READER SERVICE CARD

of the board. When mounting the IC, ob- ABOUT YOUR

serve the notch and dot code marks. Use a
low-power soldering iron and fine solder. SUBSCRIPTION
The power supply, which can be used in
Your subscription to POPULAR ELECTRONICS is
other projects, is mounted on a separate maintained on one of the world's most modern,
board. efficient computer systems, and if you're like 99%
The project is very simple to use. With of our subscribers, you'll never have any reason
power applied, turn on S1 and depress S2 to complain about your subscription service.
We have found that when complaints do arise,
for as long as desired. Both lamps will glow. the majority of them occur because people have
When S2 is released, only one lamp will written their names or addresses differently at
remain lit. 4 different times. For example, if your subscription
were listed under "William Jones, Cedar Lane,
Middletown, Arizona," and you were to renew it
The board mounts on a pair of angle as "Bill Jones, Cedar Lane, Middletown, Arizona,"
brackets and doesn't take much room. our computer would think that two separate sub-
scriptions were involved, and it would start send-
ing you two copies Of POPULAR ELECTRONICS each
month. Other examples of combinations of names
that would confuse the computer would include:
John Henry Smith and Henry Smith; and Mrs.
Joseph Jones and Mary Jones. Minor differences in
addresses can also lead to difficulties. For exam-
ple, to the computer, 100 Second St. is not the
same as 100 2nd St.
So, please, when you write us about your sub-
scription, be sure to enclose the mailing label
from the cover of the magazine-or else copy your
name and address exactly as they appear on the
mailing label. This will greatly reduce any chance
of error, and we will be able to service your
request much more quickly.

1974 Spring Edition 83

 1/wild a
Crjp(al- Co(rolled
Instrument Tuner
AN ACCURATE SOURCE OF 440 Hz. A ABOVE MIDDLE C

BY HANK OLSON

orchestras use the oboe as the in- easily divided by two to obtain 220 Hz,
MANY
strument to which all of the others are which can be used to tune a bassoon.
tuned just before a performance. The oboe Since 440 -Hz crystals are hard to find,
has been previously tuned to an accurate a crystal with a higher frequency and a
source of 440 Hz (A above middle C) Al- . suitable countdown circuit can be used.
though there are many ways of generating Such a circuit is shown in Fig. 1. The os-
the 440 Hz, the most accurate is an elec- cillator (Q1) operates at approximately 901
tronic system using a crystal -controlled os- kHz. This frequency is used because there
cillator. In this way, the pitch can be is usually available a surplus -type crystal
established within ' th of a hertz, which
1 (FT241) that will fill the bill. However,
is far better than most other tune-up sys- before starting this project, it is advisable to
tems. In addition, the 440-11z tone can be check on the availability of the crystal.
The oscillator operates in the 32-pF
Capacitor C5 is mounted on L1. Power
supply components are under Ti and C2. parallel -resonance mode and is quite stable.
Between the crystal oscillator and the
first digital divider (1C2), are two isolation
stages (Q2 and Q.3) that drive a Schmitt
trigger (ICI) to produce a clean toggle
Waveform.
The digital countdown circuit (1C2
through 1C4) needs no adjustment and is
inherently stable. Total division is 211 or
2048 which brings the crystal frequency
down to within rioth of a hertz of 440 Hz.
The oscillator frequency can be adjusted
slightly by CI to make the final frequency
even closer to 440 Hz. If a sharper or flatter
A note is required, FT241 crystals are avail-
LI able every 1.042 kHz, making each step
represent a change of about Ji Hz in output
C5 frequency.

Construction. Although almost any type

of construction can be used, an etched cir-
EREO VOLUME POWER cuit board makes the work easier (see Fig.
SELECTOR 2) A power supply circuit is shown in Fig.
.

84 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 ®*o © ®fio
® IC4
MC7493P o 0 MC7493P 0 m MC7493P

m mite m © © m © ©
440Hz
RH
5.IK
S
C12
220Hz 250.F
R12
IK

1611
SPKR
Fig. 1. Circuit schematic.

ICI

2
4

c-
5 14 2 9 8 II

IC5

10
12
3

9
R
° J -c °c R
°
R
o J
2I
-3
-4
13
E
2- Vcc
10=GND
14 Vcc 3- IC2-1C4
7-GND
PARTS LIST R1-1-megohnz, 1/2 -watt resistor
C1-8-,50-pF ceramic trimmer capacitor R2 -2000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
C2-27-pF silver -mica capacitor R3 -160,000 -ohm, 1/1 -watt resistor
C.3,C6-0.1-µF, 50 -volt .11ylar capacitor R4 -2400-ohm, 1A -watt resistor
C4-100-pF silver -mica capacitor R5 -20,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
C5--180-pF silver-mica capacitor R6 -560 -ohm, 'A -watt resistor
C7-O.01-µF, .50 -volt Mylar capacitor R7 -51 -ohm, z/ -watt resistor
C8 -C10 -10-12F, 12-volt electrolytic capacitor R8,R9-1000-ohm, '/-watt resistor
C11 --0.0033-µF, 50 -volt Mylar capacitor R10 -27 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
C12 -250-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor R11,R13-5100-ohm, 1/1 -watt resistor
C13 -0.005-µF, 100 -volt Mylar capacitor R12 -1000 -ohm potentiometer with switch
D1 -5.6 -volt, 1 -watt zener diode (1N4734A, R14 -4700 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
HEP603) R15 -10,000 -ohm, '/2 -watt resistor
ICI-Dual 4 -input gate (µL930, .11C830P, Sl-Spdt switch
SN15830N, CD2300E/830, HEPC1030P) SPKR-16-ohm speaker
IC2-1C4---4-bit binary counter (SN7493N, XTAL-901.042-kHz FT241 crystal (avail-
MC7493P, or similar) able from JAN Crystals, 2400 Crystal Dr.,
105-,4udio amp. (MFC4000P,HEPC6003) Ft. Myers, FL 33901)
L1 -120-243-µH (CTC X2060-8) Misc.-Suitable chassis, knob, line cord, rub-
L2-10 turns #24 wire wound over LI ber feet, mounting hardware, etc.
QI-FET (HEP802, MPF102, or similar) Note-An etched and drilled PC board is
Q2-Transistor (HEP51, 2N.3638, 2N5142) available from Eico, 283 ifalta St., Brook -
Q3-Transistor (HEP50. 2N3646, 2N708) 1vn, N Y 11207 for 53.00.

1974 Spring Edition 85

 o

Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern point, trimmer capacitor Cl can be set to
(above), component layout (below). adjust the frequency as close as possible.
GND
9V Operation consists simply of turning
on the power, setting the frequency selector
3 4
+ l
I* switch, and adjusting the volume. O

\
1 1
D IC RI5CI I
CIO I
I
CI CI ) I5 R3RI T 2 1

D
-r-C4 02
R13
I -R14- C12
I
XTALOS -CI3- + T
I
I SPNR
G01 I 1

C9 DI
R4R91 I
HEPI56 OI
1 I R8 RIO -WIPER HEP246
OF R12
Ce

0 220H:
I

117V
+9.
' CI I HI I C3 91
C2I R2 03 440H: AC
I -812 IÄ(

3. Although the photograph of the proto- 03

type shows the semiconductors and IC's HEPIOI
END
mounted in sockets, they are optional and
the devices may be mounted directly on the
PC board. PARTS LIST
The power supply transformer and filter C1 -0.01-µF, -kV ceramic disc capacitor
1
C2 -2000-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor
capacitor are mounted in any available C3 -10-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor
space on the chassis, with the other com- D1,D2-Diode (HEP156, 1N4002, or similar)
ponents mounted on a multi -lug terminal D3 -10 -volt, 1/4 -watt zener diode (HEPZ0220,
strip. The PC board is mounted in the 1N4104, or similar)
chassis on insulated stand-offs. The power F1 -1-ampere, 3 -AG fuse and holder
Ql-Transistor (HEP246, 2N5191, or simi-
on -off switch, the 440/220 -Hz selector lar)
switch, the volume control, and the speaker R1 -3900 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
are mounted on the front panel. SI-Spst switch (on volume control)
Once the unit is assembled the frequency TI -20 -volt CT transformer (Triad F9OX or
similar)
can be checked with a frequency counter
or by generating Lissajous patterns with a Fig. 3. Power supply schematic and parts.
suitable audio generator on a scope. At this
86 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
now -digital design color tv
build this unique, all -new Heathkit Super Set
Three years ago, Heath began its most extensive engineering
-
project the development of a truly different color TV using
digital and other design techniques unusual to the industry.
The result is spectacular.
It features: Programmable Digital Counter Channel Selector On -
Screen Digital Channel Identification On -Screen Digital Clock Read-
out (optional) Silent touch -tune electronic tuning Combination
VHF/ UHF Varactor Tuner -DC voltage controlled Exclusive Fixed-
Filter IF-ideal bandpass shape for cleaner pictures and no instrument
alignment Digital True -Dot Generator-easier color convergence
11 -Function Remote Control (optional) 100% Solid -State the -
only tube is the picture 19 integrated circuits (32 with remote) 71
discrete transistors with sockets Solid -State Tripler High Voltage
Supply Solid -State Low Voltage Supply -
short -proof IC regulators
-
Solid -State Transformerless Vertical Sweep better picture detail
-
Latest 25V Black (negative) Matrix picture tube fully illuminated
-
"black-surround" dots for brighter pictures new etched face plate
reduces glare and reflections Front access slide -out Self -Service
Drawer 20 glass -epoxy circuit modules plus 12 prefabricated wiring
harnesses with connectors for easier assembly.
The Heathkit Super Set is unlike any other color TV you've ever seen...
it silently selects channels with digital -logic accuracy...it displays the
channel numbers on the screen...it displays the time digits on the
screen ... it uses a fixed filter that never needs instrument alignment...
it uses more integrated circuitry than any other set... it is easy to use...
it is easy to look at... it is easier to build than any we've ever offered.
Pre-program any 16 channels into the digital counter. Touch a button
Optional Digital Clock for (there isn't any tuning knob), and the counter silently sweeps up or down
Eleven -Function Touch - your GR -2000... $29.95 the stations, then locks in the Varactor Tuner to the station you choose.
Tune Remote Control In just a couple hours' No mechanical contacts to clean, no turrets to make noise, no motors
for the GR -2000... $79.95' time you can build the to hum.
This all solid-state ultra-
sonic system utilizes 13 in-
GRA-2000-1 Digital Clock
Accessory. Everything
The channel numbers are 11/2" white digits on the screen -
easy to see
across the room, positionable anywhere on the screen. Add the clock
tegrated circuits, 28 tran-
sistors to give you wireless
mounts on one small
board that plugs into the
module and time is displayed below the channel numbers in 4 or 6 -
armchair control of on and readout board in the GR - digits, 12 or 24 hour format. Digits remain on for any pre-set period up
off, volume, VHF/UHF 2000 service drawer. to 11/2 minutes. Change channels or touch the "recall" button to make
channel selection, up or That's all there is to it. them re -appear.
down color intensity, and Clock circuit board has Expanded self-service devices include a separate test meter, new verti-
tint. Plus, a touch of the slow, fast and hold push-
buttons for setting time. cal and horizontal centering, new top -bottom -sides pincushioning cor-
volume button automati-
cally recalls the digital jumper wire for selecting rections, purity adjustments...and in the new slide -out service drawer
readout to the screen. Kit 12 or 24 -hour format. are computer -like programming boards for channel selection, channel
includes receiver for in - Order with your GR -2000, readout, clock readout, plus convergence circuit module.
chassis mounting and or add it on later, if you Technically, the Heathkit Super Set is the most sophisticated TV we've
hand-held transmitter. prefer.
ever offered. In addition to all the above features, it also has DC con-
Kit GRA-2000-6, Kit GRA-2000-1, Digital trolled contrast for less interference; an IC color amplifier for truer colors;
4 lbs $79.95 Clock Accy., lb. 529.95'
1
an IC color oscillator and automatic phase control for more precise,
reliable tints; an IC automatic gain control for improved sensitivity, sta-
Custom install or use one of four new cabinets. bility, and noise immunity. In total, this digital Heathkit color TV sets new
Like all Heathkit TV's the GR - standards for state-of-the-art.
2000 can be wall -mounted, or Heathkit Super Set...designed to change your mind about color TV.
choose one of the striking new
cabinet designs. The sophisti- Kit GR -2000, basic chassis and tube, 147 lbs. 5649.95
cated Contemporary model
GRA-2000-2 shown here, at
$139.95; the Mediterranean Send for FREE Heathkit Catalog. TM
GRA-2000-4, $139.95; the Schlumberger 1
Mediterranean with doors, HEATH COMPANY, Dept. 18-3
GRA-2000-5, $179.95; or the Early Benton Harbor, Michigan 49022
American model GRA-200-3, $139.95. Please send FREE Heathkit Catalog.
HEATHKIT ELECTRONIC CENTERS Please send model(s)
Units of Schlumberger Products Corporation Enclosed is E plus shipping.
ARIZ.: Phoenix; CALIF.: Anaheim. El Cerrito, Los Angeles. Pomona. Red-
wood City, San Diego (La Mesa), Woodland Hills; COLO.: Denver; CONN.:
Hartford (Avon); FLA Miami (Hialeah). Tampa. GA.: Atlanta: ILL.: Chicago,
:
Name
Downers Grove; IND.: Indianapolis; KANSAS: Kansas City (Mission); KY.:
Louisville; LA.: New Orleans (Kenner): MD.: Baltimore. Rockville: MASS.: Address
Boston (Wellesley); MICH.: Detroit: MINN.: Minneapolis (Hopkins); MO.:
St. Louis; NEB.: Omaha; N.J.: Fair Lawn; N.Y.: Buffalo (Amherst), New York City State 7ip
City, Jericho. L.I., Rochester, White Plains: OHIO: Cincinnati (Woodlawn),
Cleveland, Columbus; PA.: Philadelphia. Pittsburgh; R.I.: Providence (War- Mail order prices; F.O.B. factory. CL -495R
wick); TEXAS: Dallas. Houston; WASH.: Seattle, WIS.: Milwaukee J
CIRCLE NO. 5 ON READER SERVICE CARD

1974 Spring Edition 89

What Do You Know About Capacitors?
BY ROBERT P. BALIN

For the designer or builder of electronic perform many different functions. Test your
circuits, capacitors can sometimes be the "capacitance" by filling in the blanks below.
most baffling part of the project since
they come in various shapes and sizes and (Answers are on page 156)

1. When a tuning capaci- 2. Does tightening the

tor in a receiver is adjusting screw on a
wide open, is the compression -type
receiver tuned to the capacitor increase
low or high or decrease
end of the band? its capacitance?

What is the function of the capacitor, C, in each of the circuits shown below?

3. 4. 5.

BRN RED
BLK 6. What does the color 7. What are the
VIO
YEL
ORG
code on this molded
tubular paper
BRN value
tolerance -,
IengI811MI9
capacitor indicate
about its value
tolerance
_,
and
ORG GRN coefficient _
and temperature
of
this ceramic disc
BRN voltage rating _? capacitor as indicated
RED by the color coding?

What is the total equivalent capacitance for each of the circuits

shown here if all capacitors are identical and rated at 6 pF?

8 pF 9. pF

90 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 THE TOUCH -A -TONE
FOUR OCTAVES OF ORGAN -LIKE TONE BY CHARLES D. RAKES

ONE OF THE biggest fads sweeping the octave tone generator. Capacitors C3 -C6
rock music world is sound produced and resistors R43 -R50 comprise the gen-
purely by electronic means. Electronic or- erator's frequency determining network.
gans, drums, and castanets abound. The Switch S3 selects the desired octave range,
"Touch -A -Tone" resembles a banjo and is and the player simultaneously touches the
held in much the same manner, but there touch bar and one of the note keys (1-8) to
all similarity ends. activate the proper transistor touch switch
Capable of producing a range of four full for the note he wishes to play. Then, with
octaves (one below and three above middle his free hand, the player also contacts the
C) in organ -like tones, the Touch -A -Tone thumb touch knob.
has eight note contacts and an easy -to -reach The output of Q2 now feeds into the input
octave selector switch. It has a built-in of mixer -amplifier Q3 where it mixes with
speaker and battery supply and a variable - the tremolo beat (if the tremolo circuit is
rate tremolo control (6 to 36 beats per active) and is amplified. The output of Q.3
second) to add color to the music. Optional is taken off the wiper contact of RI and is
features include a variable -depth control for coupled to audio amplifier Q7 via C9.
the tremolo circuit and a headphone jack. Transistor stages Q4 -Q6 operate as a
Playing the Touch -A-Tone is very simple. touch switch; until it is switched open by
With one hand, the player selects any of the touching the thumb touch knob, the gate of
eight note contacts and also touches a metal Q3 is clamped to ground, allowing no output
strip (located on the rear of the neck of the from the mixer -amplifier.
instrument). He then uses the thumb of his The eight direct -coupled touch switch cir-
free hand to touch or "pick" a third contact cuits select the proper resistive value for the
located at the base of the neck. tone generator. Each circuit consists of a
pair of transistor stages: Q8/ Q9, Q10/ Q11,
About the Circuit. The tremolo circuit is etc., through Q22/ Q23. Diodes Dl through
comprised of QI and its associated com- 198 provide isolation for the touch switches.
ponents (see Fig. 1) This is a variable -rate,
. The touch bar is used to supply B+ to the
low -frequency generator, the output of inputs of each touch switch as it is selected.
which is coupled to the input of mixer - This positive voltage is applied through the
amplifier stage Q3. Potentiometer R2 ad- body resistance of the player!
justs the rate of the generated signal at the
player's discretion, and SI engages or dis- Construction. Since the physical layout
ables the tremolo circuit. of the Touch -A -Tone is not dictated by
Transistor Q2 is the heart of the four- strings or critical dimensions, you can build
1974 Spring Edition 91
 NX
V. In
K N1 m _>
O mN
?
Tr"
¢ m
,-AAAANN'er
pU
OY f
aR
¢n F
i2a

m'4
fÑ
N -41>
-Ú
m
2 Fr,

o
m_In In
m aONIO
on In
VD
NO.CN
U ZWW
O N==f LL

ÑI I

mmN
OONN
aY 00
O Oi m
OO
o
h
O
a
O

111-AANTAW----
=Y
¢o -
NY

O3
ern Y K
Ern Jm Ilb-ANNAIN--11
OW
U¡3 CO U.

M
N

eD
o
2

92 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 the circuit into almost any housing that suits
PARTS LIST your taste. Just make sure that all touch
B1 -12 -volt d.c. power source (eight 1.5 AA contacts are within easy reach.
cells connected in series) Although the circuit can be assembled on
C1 -1-µF Mylar or paper capacitor a piece of perforated phenolic board with
C2-0.03-µF paper capacitor push -in terminals for soldering, the use of a
C3 -0.377-µF paper capacitor (see text)
C4 0.19-µF paper capacitor (see text) printed circuit board is recommended (see
C5 -0.1-µF paper capacitor (see text) etching guide and component placement in
C6 -0.057-µF paper capacitor (see text) Fig. 2) The PC board reduces assembly
.

C7, C10 -C18-0.47-µF paper or Mylar capaci- time and minimizes the chances of wiring
tor
C8 -100-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor errors.
C9 -10-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor Mount the components on the board in
C19 -250-500-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capaci- the following order: fixed resistors, capaci-
tor (see text) tors, output transformer Tl, and diodes and
Dl -D9-1N4003 or 1N4004 diode transistors (before installing Q3, cut off the
Q1,Q2-2N2646 unijunction transistor
Q3-Field effect transistor (Motorola HEP - case lead). The last components to be
8011 mounted should be the eight trimmer -type
Q4-Q6,Q9,Q11,Q13,Q15,Q17,Q19,Q21,Q23- potentiometers for R43 -R50.
Bipolar transistor (Motorola HEP -725) When mounting the transistors and di-
Q7-2N2102 bipolar transistor
Q8,Q 10,Q 12,Q 14,Q 16,Q 18,Q20, Q 22-Bipolar odes, heat sink all leads whenever heat is
transistor (2N3638 or Motorola MPS3638) applied. Also, leave about %" of space be-
R1 -39,000 -ohm tween the bottoms of the transistors and
R3,R8-270-ohm the top of the circuit board. Then carefully
R4-22 -ohm
R5-See text check the polarities of the electrolytic ca-
R6 -680,000 -ohm pacitors, diodes, and transistors, and the
R7-1-megohni orientation of Ti. Flip over the circuit board
R9 -27 -ohm All and make sure that all leads are properly
R 10-1.5-m egoh m resistors
R12,R15,R16,R19,R21,R22,R24, 1/2 -watt soldered to the foil; resolder any connections
R25,R27,R28,R30,R31,R33,R34, that appear "grainy." After making sure that
R.36,R37,R39,R40,R42-3.300-oh m no solder bridges exist between closely
R 13,R 14,R20,R23,R26,R29,R32, spaced foil conductors, set the hoard aside.
R35,R38,R41-10,000-ohm
R17 -150,000 -ohm Now lay a piece of hardboard wall panel-
R18 -4.7 -ohm ing face down on a flat surface. Set the wood
R2 -150,000 -ohm potentiometer bowl rim down on top of the paneling and
R11 -5000 -ohm potentiometer strike a pencil line on the paneling around
R43-R50-PC-type miniature potentiometer the circumference of the bowl. Remove the
(see text)
Sl,S2-Spst switch (for R2 and R11) bowl and set it aside. Then, working care-
S3-Sp 4 -pos. rotary switch fully with a sabre saw or router, cut out the
SPKR-3.2-ohm, 3" loudspeaker circular piece and sand the rough edges.
T1-400 :4 -ohm, 300-tnW output transformer
(Allied Radio Corp. No. 54A2367, or sim-
ilar)
1 -111/2" -diameter x 31/2" -deep wood bowl FREQUENCY IN HERTZ'
8-1" -diameter chrome -plated drawer pulls
1-Spoon-shaped, chrome -plated drawer pull FIRST SECOND THIRD FOURTH
1-Chrome-plated lever knob
Misc.-Control knobs (2); 32" x 4" x 34" OCTAVE OCTAVE OCTAVE OCTAVE
piece of redwood; hardboard panel; dual
AA -cell battery holders (4); 9" x 47/s" per- R43 2093 1047 523 262
forated phenolic board with push -in solder
terminals (or see text for printed circuit R44 1976 988 494 247
board); rubber cement; #6 hardware and R45 1760 880 440 220
solder lugs; spacers; aluminum or brass
stock for touch bar; speaker grille; phone R46 1568 784 392 196
jack (optional); color -coded hookup wire;
solder; etc. R47 1397 698 349 175

R48 1319 659 329 165

Fig. To simplify schematic diagram
1.
and save space, only first and last R49 1117 587 294 147
note touch switch circuits are shown.
R50 1047 523 262 131
Circuits omitted are exactly same as
those shown, including parts values.
*As observed from oscilloscope patterns or read iron,
frequency counter.

1974 Spring Edition 93

94 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 R3 R4 R19 R/ 0
OI S3 R21
R2 A
WIPER

R5 -- Q8
R43
C2 R 24
CII
,.-; Q10
R6 R23
R8- -R27
R44

R7
RIO --- -012
R45
R30
Fig. 2. Actual size printed cir- RII

-
015 C13 ,s ---Q14
cuit etching guide is shown on
opposite page; component place- R2 . R29
R46
ment on board is shown at right. R13
D4 R33
Refer to packages or cases for Q4 Q17
transistor lead identification. R14
R3t
C14
R32
-Q16
R47
RI6
C19
RI--
-
C
18
I' R354K`"- Q
RII R48
WIPER- R39
R17
Q7 --Q20
R49
D7 R42
Q23
C17
R40 -022
V
SP KR
R18 D8
R41
R50

BI-

This piece will serve as the front panel. :Mount a 16%" -long by 1Ñ" -wide (almost
Now, referring to Fig. 3, finish fabricating any thickness between 22 gauge and 34")
the front panel according to the dimensions strip of aluminum about 34" to one side of
given. This done, set aside the front panel, the center groove (see Fig. 4) , using 14"
and fashion the neck of the instrument from woodscrews. Connect an 8" length of white
redwood or other decorative lumber. When hookup wire to the screw nearest the bowl
the neck piece is cut to size with the desired end of the neck piece. Then carefully cut a
outline, rout out a :y10" -deep `In %H" -wide shallow groove with a sharp knife between
groove down the center of the scar to pro- this last connection point to the center
vide a channel for the touch contact wires. groove, and route the white wire through
Drill eight equally spaced Vs" holes both grooves.
through the center of the groove in the neck Anchor the neck to the front panel with
piece. Then place a #6 solder lug on each of three sets of 6-32 hardware. To do this, first
the eight screws provided with the drawer - center the spoon -shaped drawer pull at the
pull "touch contacts," and mount a drawer base of the neck, and fasten it there with a
pull at each hole location. screw equipped with a #6 solder lug to
Solder a length of hookup wire to each of which a 6" length of gray hookup wire has
the solder lugs (measure these wires from been soldered.
the solder lug to the base of the neck and Mount the speaker and grille, volume
add 8" to each length). If possible, use and tremolo controls, and octave selector
color -coded wire for easy contact lead iden- switch in their respective holes (and the
tification. A good code to use is black, optional headphone jack, if used), as
brown, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and shown in Fig. 4. Pass a 13L" oval -head
violet for contacts 1 through 8, respectively. machine screw through the center hole on
1974 Spring Edition 95
 16 3/4"

ALUMINUM TOUCH BAR 3/8° WIDE

r 3-5/8
1

3/8%3/16SL0T \2-1/2
L \J t

8 3/4"
HOLES FOR TOUCH CONTACTS
2° AFAR T
3/4"RED WOOD BOARD

WALL PANEL 5-1/4"-A- -V2'

I
TO FIT WOOD
BOWL 31"

Fig. 3. Cut wall panel to fit outer circumference of bowl used. Locate holes
for note touch contact mounting as shown, aluminum touch bar above groove.

the front panel, slide on a lockwasher, and Tuning. To make the method of playing
screw all the way on a 1" threaded spacer. the Touch -A -Tone similar to that of a
Slide on the circuit board, foil pattern guitar, the instrument must be tuned so
down, follow with another lockwasher, that the high-frequency notes are played
and screw onto the threaded screw stub by touching the contacts nearest the bowl.
another 23K" length of threaded spacer. Each successive contact away from the bowl
(Note: If you cannot obtain the second should diminish the frequency of the note
spacer in the required length, try sand- generated.
wiching a few flat washers between the The simplest method of tuning the in-
board and a shorter spacer to obtain the strument is to use a frequency counter.
proper final length. In this case, substitute However, if a frequency counter is not
a 2" oval-head screw to start with.) available, you can use an audio generator
Now referring to Figs. 1 and 2, inter- and oscilloscope. In fact, if you are a mu-
connect all components and assemblies. If sician and have a good ear for pitch and
you are using the optional headphone jack, access to a properly tuned piano, you can
reroute the wiring from the output of the even tune the instrument by ear.
transformer through the jack as shown in To prepare for tuning by either of the
Fig. 5, then to the speaker. electronic methods, make sure the trem-
When connecting the color-coded wires olo is off. Take the output of the Touch -
from the various touch contacts to the cir- A -Tone from the speaker terminals. First,
cuit board, leave about 1" of slack and clip solder a 0.047-p.F capacitor (C6) in posi-
away any excess. Then to finish initial as- tion 1 of octave selector switch S3. Then
sembly; wire the battery holders for a connect one clip lead between B1-1- and
series hookup, and connect the loose ends the thumb touch contact, and another clip
of the wires from the positive and negative lead between B1+ and contact 1 on the
holder contacts to the appropriate points in neck of the instrument. If you are using
the circuit. the frequency counter, simply set R43 (see

Fig. 4. Neck piece at-

taches to wall panel
with three screws.
Locate spoon -shaped
drawer pull at base.

96
 to another, you will have to move the ap-
propriate clip lead from touch contact to
touch contact.
When you are finished tuning the first
SPKR
octave, you can, if you desire, replace the
trimmer potentiometers with fixed resis-
Fig. 5. Wire headphone jack as shown; tors of appropriate values to obviate pe-
connect to points A and B in schematic. riodic retuning. If you leave the pots in
Fig. 2) for a reading of 2093 Hz on the place, readjustment about twice a year
frequency counter. will be sufficient.
Now, move the second clip lead to con- Next, install a 0.1-pt.F capacitor (C5)
tact 2, and set R44 for a reading of 1976 in position 2 of S3. Parallel connect a
Hz. Continue moving the second clip lead 0.15-11F capacitor with a 0.04-µF capaci-
and adjusting the proper trimmer po- tor to make the specified 0.19-11F value
tentiometers for the frequencies indicated for C4; connect this assembly in position
under the "First Octave" column in the 3 of S.3. In like mariner, to make the
table on page 93. 0.377-µF value specified for C3, parallel -
To use the oscilloscope/signal generator connect a 0.33-ti.F capacitor with a 0.047-
method of tuning, set up the clip leads as µF capacitor, and solder this assembly into
described above. Then connect another pair position 4 of S3.
of leads between the output of the Touch - If you do not want the variable -depth
A -Tone and the horizontal input and control for the tremolo circuit, simply in-
ground of the scope. Connect a final pair stall and solder a 1.5-megohm resistor in
of leads between the output of the audio the R5 position on the circuit board. For
generator and vertical input and ground variable -depth, mount a 1.5-megohm poten-
of the scope. tiometer in a convenient location on the
Now, first tune the audio generator to front panel of the Touch-A -Tone. Solder
the frequency listed under the "First Oc- one end of a 680,000 -ohm, l& -watt resistor
tave" column in the Table, and adjust the to the \viper lug of this potentiometer. Then
setting of the proper trimmer potentiometer connect the free end of the resistor to one
to obtain a circle on the screen of the of the R.5 holes in the board, and a length
scope. (Note: if you have a meter avail- of hookup wire between the right lug of
able, set the output signal level of the in- the pot (viewed from the rear) and the
strument to the same signal level of the other R.5 hole.
generator.) The circle indicates that the Assemble the instrument, and you are
Touch -A-Tone and audio generator are ready to play a tune. With a little prac-
tuned to the same frequency. Also, remem- tice, it will not be long before you are
ber that as you move from one trim pot playing like an old pro. Q.

One suggested layout for controls and speaker on front panel is shown in photo below.
If headphone jack and variable -depth tremolo are used, mount on rear near RI and RII.
 QUIZ ON AC CIRCUIT THEORY
BY ROBERT P. BALIN

Voltage measurements made in a series ac cir- This relationship, (VT)2 - (VL-VC)2 + (VR)2, can be
cuit seldom add up as simply as they do in a used to find any unknown voltage if all others are
dc circuit. You may even find the voltage across known.
a coil or capacitor to be greater than the supply In parallel ac circuits, the currents add up the
voltage! Nevertheless, Ohm's Law and Kirchhoff's same way as voltages do in a series ac circuit.
Law do apply, and careful measurements will show Brush up on your ac theory and see if you can
that the supply voltage and the various voltage solve the missing voltage or current in the Circuits
drops around a series ac circuit are related in an below. Where necessary, the voltages and currents
unusual way: the square of the supply voltage is are related by the 3:4:5 ratio to provide easy, whole
equal to the square of the difference between the number answers. Only simple algebra is required.
voltage on the coil and the voltage on the capac- Vectors, phasors, and quadratic equations are not
itor, plus the square of the voltage on the resistor. necessary to find the solutions.
(Answers are on page 156)

7V

'6V
©IOV ©zov 12V ©24V

-V

1 2 3
v

15V

111 111
350
V
50V
I©15V

-V ©- 16V ©-V 12V

50V

350V
4 5 3v
6

98
7
©
- m A

6mA0

08mA

8
r
© '16mA
lit
A

9
0 mA

.g4
10
09mA

ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

_m

mA
 CARE AND
HANDLING OF
C AXIAL
CONNECTORS
THE QUICK,
FOOLPROOF
WAY
BY WILLIAM I. ORR, W6SAI

MANY of the so-called UHF connectors vention of the devil. A look at the PL -259
were developed during World War II plug shows instantly how it should fit on
for use with medium size coaxial r.f. cables the end of a piece of coax cable; the in-
(such as RG-8/ U and RG-11 / U) Now . stallation is self-evident! But, alas, getting
generally supplanted by the newer Series N the plug properly astride the cable end and
connectors in commercial equipment, these soldered firmly in place is a frustrating and
inexpensive and readily available UHF con- time-consuming task. In too many instances,
nectors are still widely used on amateur, the user simply gives up the battle, jams
CB, and SWL equipment. The most com- the connector on the end of the cable, and
mon members of this family are the male solders what he can, leaving whiskers of
plugs (PL -259, PL -259A, and UG-295/ U ) copper braid ready to short out the plug.
and the female receptacles (SO -239, UG- True, the plug manufacturers provide
296/U). nifty little drawings showing how the plug
The male plug, a beguilingly simple af- should be placed on the cable; but these
fair, has a non-constant impedance, is a pieces of advertising art merely make the
non-waterproof device and (to many ex- frustrating experience seem more bitter,
asperated amateurs and CB'ers) is an in- since sooner or later most amateurs conic
1974 Spring Edition 99
to the reluctant conclusion that the PL -259
plug was never intended to be placed on a UHF CONNECTORS
coaxial cable by the hand of man! For RG-8A/U and RG -58/U Cable
I have battled the PL -259 plug prob-
Plugs: PL -259, PL -259A, UG-295/U
lem for longer than I care to admit and Adapters for RG -58/U: UG-175/U, UG-410/U
I finally solved the dilemma by switching Right-angle adapter: UG-297/U, UG-646/U,
to the newer and better type N coaxial M-359
fittings, which were seemingly designed Adapter, straight (female -female): PL -258, UG-
by a sane mind. However, time does not 360/U, UG-299/U
march on, and a large amount of gear in Receptacle: SO -239, UG-296/U
the W6SAI station is equipped with the Adapter, straight (male-male): Dow -Key F-2
PL -259's matching partner, the ubiqui- Hybrid adapters:
UHF (female) to BNC (male): UG-255/U
tous SO -239.
UHF (male) to BNC (female): UG-273/U
Finally, with the assistance of W6CYL, UHF (female to N (male): UG-146A/U
who had made his peace with the coaxial UHF (male to N (female): UG-83B/U
plug problem, it was decided to try a sys- UHF (female) to male phono connector:
tem approach that would solve the PL -259 Dow -Key A-210
question once and for all. Here is the solu- UHF (male) to male phono connector:
tion. Dow-Key A-211
UHF plug (solderless): Amphenol 83-851
Coaxial Connector Assembly. The mating (for RG-8A/U)
cable must be properly prepared if the
connector is expected to operate to its full-
est capability. With a little care and some ing iron or gun, quickly and smoothly tin
inexpensive tools, a well -engineered assem- the braid, making the shield a solid entity.
bly may he made in a few minutes. In ad- Do this quickly so as not to unduly over-
dition to a soldering iron or gun, you will heat the inner polyethylene insulation of
need: a ruler, a sharp knife (the Stanley the cable. If you take too long, the inner
99A Shop Knife is recommended), and a insulation will melt and "squirt" out be-
tubing cutter (the General Hardware #123 tween the interstices of the braid. Don't
Midget Tubing Cutter is recommended). worry; you'll obtain expertise in soldering
Oh yes, you'll need a pair of wire cutters the braid once you set your hand to it.
to snip the cable to proper length, also. Clean the left -over flux from the braid with
Follow this procedure carefully: paint thinner after the solder cools.
Step 1. Slide the coupling ring of the Step .3. Next, cut the soldered braid
PL-259 over the coaxial line. Next, take the with the tubing cutter. You want to cut
shop knife and circumscribe a cut in the it sa that 7/»;" is left exposed. Using a soft
outer, black jacket of the cable about 1h" pencil, make a mark on the braid exactly
back from the end. Make the cut at right 746" out from the black jacket. Place the
angles to the cable so that the end of the tubing cutter over the braid so that the
vinyl jacket will be square and ship-shape. cutter wheel falls on the pencil mark. Tight-
Slit the free end of the jacket with the en the cutter a bit and slowly revolve it
knife and peel it off. about the cable. Tighten the cutter wheel
Step 2. You now have part of the outer once or twice again and continue to revolve
braided shield exposed. Using a hot solder - the cutter. Four or five revolutions, and
the tubing cutter will neatly slice the solid
braid. The unwanted braid end may be
1/4"
easily pulled off, using the wire cutters as
\
I

RG -6A/ CABLE snips.

7/16" /16"
I
Step 4. Trim the inner polyethylene in-
3/4" ] sulation of the cable. It should be cut
cleanly (using the utility knife) so that
a collar about 11e, " wide is left at the end
CONDUCTOR
POLYETHYLENE of the outer braid which was just trimmed.
INSULATION
OUTER BRAID (TINNED)
Go slowly, so that you do not nick the
inner conductor. Once the slug of insula-
By the time you have finished step 4, the end tion is free, it may he removed from the
of your RG-8A/U cable should look like this. cable by grasping it with your fingers and
100 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
slowly but firmly pulling and rotating it
at the same time. When the slug is off, tin
the inner conductor.
Step 5. You have now come to the mo-
ment of truth. The cable is ready for the
PL-259 shell. It should be pushed on the
cable end and rotated with the fingers so
that the internal threads of the shell are
screwed onto the outer vinyl jacket of the
cable. As the plug is screwed onto the
cable, you should see the tinned outer
jacket appear through the four solder holes
of the plug. Continue twisting the plug
onto the cable until the braid is completely
visible through all holes.
Step 6. The last step is to solder the
braid through the solder holes of the plug
and solder the center conductor to the
center terminal of the plug. Use an iron
or gun with a small point and make neat
connections to the braid taking care that Photo shows, from top to bottom, the
the solder does not run over the outer result of steps in preparing the cable.
threads of the plug. With a little care,
you'll have a work of art. When joints
(52 -ohm cable) requires a UG-175/U
cool, examine your masterpiece and then
adapter and RG-59/ U (72 -ohm cable) re-
slide the coupling ring down over the plug.
quires a UG176/U adapter. Follow much
the same procedure detailed above with
Sealing for Outdoor Use. The PL -259 is the exceptions noted below.
not waterproof and must be protected Step 1. Insert the cable end through the
against moisture by an additional cover- coupling ring and the adapter. Note that
ing. If water does get into the plug, it can the knurled end of the ring and the nar-
be very quickly sucked down the coaxial row end of the adapter face the open end
cable by capillary action. Soon the entire of the cable. Cut the end off i" of the
outer braid becomes corroded and line loss cable jacket with the utility knife.
rises rapidly. Step 2. Fan the braid out slightly and
To seal the plug and line properly, the fold it back over the outer jacket.
mating surface between the plug and the Step 3. Push the adapter forward under
matching SO -239 receptacle should be the braid and trim the braid with small,
packed with silicone grease. The connectors sharp scissors to a length of %". Next, using
are then mated and the excess grease is the utility knife, remove %" of the insulation
forced out of the joint and wiped off. The from the center conductor. Be careful not
next step is to wrap the coaxial joint thor- to nick the conductor. Tin the exposed
oughly with pressure sensitive vinyl elec- conductor quickly with a small soldering
trical tape. Several layers of tape should iron.
be used; and the wrappings should extend Step 4. Carefully screw the plug assem-
beyond each connector a minimum of four bly onto the adapter. The center conductor
inches, making the total wrap about ten will pass through the center pin and the
inches long. The tape should be put on braid should appear through the side holes
under tension, with one layer overlapping of the plug assembly. Using an iron with
the one beneath. As a final precaution, the a small soldering tip, solder the braid
cable run should be dressed so that water through the plug assembly holes. Use just
cannot run to a joint and stand there. enough heat to bond the braid to the shell.
After these have cooled, solder the center
Use With Small Cables. The popular connector to the tip of the plug. Finally,
PL-259 UHF plug may be used with screw the coupling ring on the assembly.
small -diameter coaxial cables (such as Waterproofing and sealing are even
RG -58/U and RG-59/U) by adding a re- more important when using either the
duction adapter. For example, RG-58/U RG -58/U or RG-59/U cable. O
1974 Spring Edition 101
BUILD THE

TWO-TONE
"WAVERLY" ALARM
AUDIBLE WARNING OF MANY USES

BY DON LANCASTER

YOU EVER needed an audio The Alarm can be set to nun continu-
HAVE
tone source that was really loud, ab- ously or it can be turned on with a local
solutely distinctive, or even downright switch or a remotely operated contactor.
annoying? If so, the Two -Tone Alarm There are two outputs; a low-level one
is for you. which can be amplified in any audio am-
The circuit of the Alarm automati- plifier and a high-level one that can be
cally switches the audible output from used to drive a conventional speaker
500 to 1000 Hz five times a second, pro- directly.
ducing a "twee -dell, twee -dell" sound You can use the Alarm as a panic but-
that can't be missed anywhere and posi- ton, a novelty audio device, an electronic
tively can't be ignored. By adding an doorbell, a selective call, a Science Fair
optional potentiometer to the circuit, the multivibrator demonstrator, a br.rglar
sound level can be changed from a high alarm, or as a signalling device for high -
tweet to a low growl. noise industrial environments.

102 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 RI R2 R6 R7
10K 22K 22K
1 10K

R4
10K

m00®m00
1 O O ICI V 0

0000000
CI C2 MC789P
yF .IpF

Ja RS
AMP 2.2K

KEYED
s

SI CONT.

JI
INPUT

R1 -R4 -10,000 -ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor

PARTS LIST R5 -2200 -ohm, 1/.t -watt resistor
BI-D cell (2) R6,R7-22,000-ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor
C1,C2- 0.1-µF, 10 -volt disc ceramic capacitor SI-Spst normally open pushbutton switch
C3,C4-10-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor S2-Spst slide .switch
ICI-MRTL hex inverter (Motorola MC789P) Misc.-PC terminals (4), 3" x 4" x 5" case,
JI-J3-Phono jack mounting hardware, battery holder (Key-
QI -2N1613 npn medium -power transistor stone 176), PM speaker and enclosure (op-
or similar) tional), wire, solder, etc.
Fig. 1. The circuit is essentially a pair of audio oscillators that inter-
act with each other to produce the strange sound. Note that the
positive side of the battery is grounded to the chassis to ease wiring.

HOW IT WORKS
The integrated circuit used here is called a Construction. A schematic diagram of
hex inverter and contains -ix separate invert- the Alarm is shown in Fig. 1. While it
ing amplifier stages. Two of these stages are is not essential, a printed circuit board
combined with Rn. R7, C3, and C4 to form a greatly simplifies the assembly. If you
5 -Hz astable multivibrator square -wave os-
want to make your own, use the foil pat-
(

cillator t. Two more inverters are combined

with RI through R4 and (.1 and (:2 to form a tern and drilling details shown in Fig. 2.
second astable multivibrator that can operate Mount the parts as shown in Fig. 3. The
at either 500 or 1000 Hz, depending on the integrated circuit polarity is identified
state of the 5 -Hz multivibrator and feedback
through R3 and R4. by a notch (between pins 1 and 14) and
The remaining inverters provide load isola- a dot. In the illustrations it is shown
tion, while transistor QI provides enough from the top. 13e sure to orient it prop-
drive to handle a permanent -magnet speaker. erly and use a small soldering iron and
Power for the Alarm is obtained from two
D cells. Any other medium -current do supply fine solder when installing it. Also, be
with a voltage from 1.5 to 6 volts can be used. careful about the polarities of electro-
Switches SI and S2 and jack JI are all in lytic capacitors C3 and C4.
parallel to energize the Alarm. To simplify Assemble the Alarm in a 3" X 4" X
the assembly, the case is connected to the
keyed positive supply level PC terminal Y I.
I
5" metal box. The battery holder is
mounted on the bottom with pap rivets
1974 Spring Edition 103
 0
#67DRILL
irereIÄ3
/(4)

o
1/16 DRILL(4)

Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern for the Two -Tone Generator. The IC
is oriented so that pin 1 is adjacent to the small dot on the foil pattern.
After fabrication, the board can be drilled as shown at left and PC
terminals can be used at the four lettered locations. The board is
supported by spacers at each corner. Fig. 3 shows parts location.

or #6 hardware, while the PC board Capacitors Cl and C2 determine the

goes on the top with suitable spacers or frequency of the lowest note, while C3
#6 hardware. and C4 determine the switching rate.
The difference between the highest and
Operation: To test the Alarm, either lowest notes is determined by R.3 and
connect the amplifier output (J3) to a R4. You can experiment with any of
suitable amplification system or attach these values to get different audio results.
a low -impedance (4-, 8-, or 16 -ohm) Volume should be more than enough
speaker to the speaker jack (J2). The for most applications. If you want more,
Alarm should operate immediately. however, try using a higher supply volt-
To vary the output sound, add a 500 - age (up to 6 volts) You can also use
.

or 1000 -ohm potentiometer in series an output matching transformer or a

with Si. high -efficiency horn -type speaker. O

R5
R2

RI
C
QI

C2

R4

R3

Fig. 3. Although the alarm can be built in almost any type of case, the
prototype was built within a small metal enclosure. Install the compo-
nents on the PC board as shown at left and mount batteries on other side.

104 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

ASSEMBLE AN LED COMMUNICATOR

THE OPTICOM
PRIVATE COMMUNICATIONS
VIA AN INVISIBLE LIGHT BEAM

BY FORREST M. MIMS, III AND HENRY E. ROBERTS

LOOKING for a totally private, jam -proof, Transmitter. The circuit of the transmit-
interference-free communications sys- ter is shown in Fig. 1. During voice opera-
tem? Try the "Opticom." tion, Ql and Q2 provide amplification and
Using a light-emitting diode in the trans- impedance matching between the 20 -mV
mitter and phototransistor in the receiver, signal from the crystal microphone and Q3.
the Opticom is a voice -modulated infrared The amplifier formed by Q1 and Q2 is
optical communicator. It operates at 9400 coupled to provide a low -frequency cutoff
angstroms and has a range of over 1500 feet to minimize 60 -Hz response. Darlington
in darkness. The range is considerably less emitter follower Q.3 supplies bias current to
in daylight; but, depending on sun angle and the LED from B2. Potentiometer R9 pro-
cloud cover, it can reach 100 feet without vides an unmodulated current -level adjust-
use of special filters or light shields. ment for the LED and should he set so that
The key to the amount of range obtainable Yi volt is read across R11. From Ohms law,

is in the lenses used at the transmitter and '2 volt across 10 ohms indicates a current
receiver. In the prototype, simple, low-cost level of 50 milliamperes. This is well below
lenses were used. Employing a pair of bin- the 100 -mA capability of the SSL-55C LED
oculars or a low-cost telescope at each end without a heat sink.
would greatly increase the operating range. Tone operation is provided by connecting
1974 Spring Edition 107
 180K
RI R2 R5 R6 R9
IOK 180K 3.9K I0K
RII
Ion
03
R12} MPSAI2
4.7K
1
C3
/4.7yF 8 S 2-

CI
I
QI
MPS6514
02
B2
3V -- -9V
+
BI

cDMIC
R3 R4 R7 R8 RIO
30K IK 20K 200.0. 3.9K DI

51

-1-----` .C4
.047yF
R13
56K
TEST

Fig. 1. The LED transmitter consists of a two -stage audio amplifier driving
a Darlington modulator. When S1 is depressed, the audio amplifier is con-
verted into an audio oscillator, used for making the original optical setup.

PARTS LIST R13-56,000 -ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor

TRANSMITTER SI-Normally open pushbutton switch
B1 -9 -volt battery S2-Dpst slide or toggle switch
B2-Two 11/ -volt C cells Q1,Q2-MPS6514 or HEP728 transistor
C1,C2-0.047-µF, 10 -volt capacitor Q3-Darlington transistor (Motorola
C3 -4.7-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor MPSA12)
C4-0.0047-µF, 10 -volt capacitor Misc.-Suitable chassis, miniature crystal
DI-Light-emitting diode (GE SSL-55C)* microphone, lens, battery holders, battery
R1,R5-180,000-ohm, 1/s -watt resistor clips, mounting hardware, cement, wire,
R2-10,000 -ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor solder, etc.
R3 -30,000 -ohm. 1/4 -watt resistor *Available from Miniature Lamp Department,
R4 -1000 -ohm, í -watt resistor
1 General Electric Co., Nela Park, Cleve-
R6,R10-3900-ohm, 1 -watt resistor I
land, OH 44112, $4.16, plus postage.
R7 -20,000 -ohm. ' i -watt resistor Note-The following are available from
R8 -200 -ohm, 1/ -Iran resistor MITS, 6328 Linn, NE, Albuquerque, N. M.
R9-10,000-oh'n, 1 -watt potentiometer 87108: etched and drilled PC board,
(Mallory MLC l -IL or similar) $3.50; PC board and all electronic items
R11 -10 -ohm, I2 -watt resistor except switches. microphone, batteries,
R12-4700 -ohm. ' -watt resistor
"i
and housing. .1,1.3.50: all postpaid.

the feedback circuit comprised of R13 and tensity at its active surface. In essence, light
C4 to the input of Ql through Sl. With SI replaces Q1's base lead. Since QI is quite
depressed, the amplifier formed by QI and light sensitive, even a moderate level of
Q2 oscillates at about 500 Hz and supplies ambient illumination will drive it into satura-
100% modulation to the LED. tion. Transistors Q2 and Q3 provide a dy-
The transmitter circuit is assembled on a namic load for Ql, preventing saturation or
printed circuit board as shown in Fig. 2. In cutoff and extending useful daylight receiv-
installing the semiconductors, use care-par- ing range. The FET, Q4, matches the high
ticularly with the LED, whose leads should impedance of the detection circuit to the
have a heat sink attached while soldering. audio amplifier formed by Q5 and Q6. The
Make sure that the window of the LED is complete receiver circuit provides a voltage
parallel to the PC board. gain of about 400.
A foil pattern and component layout for
Receiver. A schematic of the receiver cir- the receiver printed circuit board are shown
cuit is shown in Fig. 3. Phototransistor QI in Fig. 4. Be very careful when installing
passes a current proportional to the light in- phototransistor QÍ because it has a plastic
108 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 -52-

-++
9V
-3V
82
SI

Fig. 2. The PC board foil pattern is shown actual size. When

installing the components, use a heat sink on the LED (D1) and
make sure that the window is facing the component side of the
board. Make board larger than foil pattern to allow mounting holes.

ADJUSTABLE
SPACERS

Assemble transmitter on four

adjustable spacers so that win-
dow of LED can be placed at
focal point of lens. When as-
sembling complete chassis be
sure to mount the batteries so
that they do not obstruct light
path between LED and lens.
Although the prototype nas
microphone on chassis, a re-
mote mike can be used. Even
S2 can be mike -mounted
push -to -talk switch. Oscillator
switch S1 is rarely used, so
can remain on the chassis.

109
 In assembling transmitter, arrange board Receiver must be assembled in manner
and lens mounting so that LED window is similar to transmitter, with window of
on center line of lens. Text explains how Q1 at focal point of lens. In both receiver
to adjust board to make lens focus at win- and transmitter, once focus is attained,
dow of light -emitting diode on the board. drop of cement on screws holds settings.

package and the leads are fragile. The col- the lens at a distance from a piece of white
lector of this transistor is indicated by a paper so that the smallest recognizable
small arrow on the bottom. Place the tran- image is displayed on the paper. Measure
sistor through the 0.175" hole at the center the distance between the lens center and
of the receiver board ( domed window to the the paper-this is the focal length. The
component side) , be sure the leads are chassis to be used should be long enough
properly oriented, and then solder them to so that, with the lens mounted at one end
the correct points. Use a clip -on heat sink and the PC board carrying the LED or
when installing all semiconductors. phototransistor at the other, the distance
between the two can be adjusted to the
Assembly. Once both boards have been focal length of the lens.
completed and checked for possible wiring The chassis used must have a cover so
errors, the system is ready for packaging. that the interior is dark when the system is
You can use the arrangement described in use.
here or you can strike out on your own. If, Drill four holes for mounting the PC
for example, you need only a 15 -to -20 -ft. board in one end of the chassis. Temporarily
range, an optical system is not required. All mount the chassis with four screws and nuts
you have to do is aim the two boards at to allow for adjustments. Make measure-
each other, depress the transmitter Test ments to determine the location of the cen-
pushbutton, and align the two units. Then ter of the light-sensitive semiconductor with
release the button and talk. respect to its location on the chassis wall.
If you want a night range of up to 1500', The center of the lens must be in the same
you must use a lens at both transmitter and position on the opposite end. Make the hole
receiver. Obtain two low-cost magnifying for the lens about ;4" smaller in diameter
lenses at least one inch in diameter and re- than the lens.
move the lenses from their housing or The crystal microphone and two switches
frames. Measure the focal length of each for the transmitter are mounted on the same
lens by placing it in the beam of a fairly end as the PC board on the transmitter chas-
distant light source. The sun is ideal, but an sis. Cut a clean hole for acoustic access to
overhead lamp, about 10 feet away will do. the microphone, which is cemented to the
The focal length is determined by placing inside of the chassis. The battery clips are
110 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 RI R6 R7 R9 RII R12
1.5 K 2.4M 10K 150K 3.9K 75K 1.5K
C2
02 CNF .Iy.1F
2N3906
SI

D8
35
UF
C4 C6
IyF .INF DAY.
R3 04 05 06 S2
4.7M 2N5458 MPS 6514 MPS6514
D
NIGHT
01
HEP312
TC7
35,7 JI
E

4.7M TC5
2.2
NF
R5
4.7K
R8
22K
RIO
20011
R13
10K
814
10011 BI
9V - T
Fig. 3. Consisting of an audio amp ifier driven by a phototransistor circuit,
receiver can use either two or three audio stages for day or night opera-
tion. There is no actual base connection to Q1 as light from LED does job.
PARTS LIST R7 -1.50,000-ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor
RECEIVER R8-22.000 -ohm, 1/1 -watt resistor
R9 -3900 -ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor
BI -9
-volt battery R10 -200 -ohm. 1/1 -watt resistor
C1,C2,C4,C6-0.1-µF, 10 -volt capacitor R11 -75,000-ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor
C3 -0.001-µF, 10 -volt capacitor R14-100-ohm,1/.1-watt resistor
C5 -22-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor SI-Spst slide or toggle switch
C7,C8-35-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor S2-Spdt slide or toggle switch
J1-Earphone jack and plug Misc.-Suitable chassis, lens, battery con-
QI-HEP.312 phototransistor nectors, battery clips, mounting hardware,
Q2,Q3-2N3906 or HEP715 transistor cement, earphone (250 ohms or more),
Q4 -2N5458 or HEP801 FET solder, wire, etc.
Q5, Q6-11PS6514 or HEP728 transistor Note-The following are available from
R1,R12-1500-ohm, 1/1 -watt resistor MITS- 6328 Linn, NE, Albuquerque,
R2-2.4-megohm, 1/4 -watt resistor N. M. 87108: etched and drilled PC board,
R3,R4-4.7-megohm, 1 í -watt resistor $3.75; PC board and all electronic items
R5--4700-ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor except switches, earphone, batteries, and
R6,R13-10,000-ohm, 1/4 -watt resistor housing, ..12.50; all postpaid.

mounted within the chassis, in a location Lens hole should be slightly smaller than
where the batteries do not interfere with the lens. Use epoxy cement to mount lens to
light path from the lens to the LED. inside of chassis to prevent loosening.
On the receiver chassis use similar loca-
tions for the two switches and the earphone
jack. Before mounting any components on
the chassis, make sure that all mounting
holes have been drilled and deburred; and,
if desired, paint the chassis. Mount the PC
boards with long screws to permit adjust-
ment of focus. Put nuts on the screws on
both sides of the boards to permit making
the adjustment and locking the board in
place.
When the wiring is complete and before
mounting the lenses, test the units by aiming
the active elements at each other. Turn on
the transmitter and measure the voltage
111
across R11. Adjust R9 until this voltage is '2 which glows orange when illuminated by
volt. With both units operating, depress the the invisible infrared from the LED. Just
transmitter pushbutton Si and move the re- activate the screen by placing it near a
ceiver slightly un'i1 a loud tone is heard in 100 -watt lamp for a few seconds, turn off
the earphone. 1f no tone is heard, test the the room lights, and aim the transmitter
receiver by aiming it at a 117 -volt 60 -Hz at the screen from a few feet away. You
light. If the receiver is operating properly, can order an IR phosphor screen, called
you should hear a distinct 60- or 120-Hz the Tell -Tale Card, from General Electric
hum. If you do not, troubleshoot the re- (Order #3-3361, Miniature Lamp Products
ceiver. Once it is working, and you still get Dept., Nela Park, Cleveland, Ohio 44112;
no signal from the transmitter, troubleshoot price $1.75).
it.
With both units working, mount the lenses Range Testing. Place the transmitter on
using a commercially available sealant. a level mount and point it along a path un-
Mount them on the inside of the chassis so impeded by obstacles for at least several
that they cover the holes and their centers hundred feet. With the Test pushbutton
are in line with the light-sensitive semicon- (SI) either depressed or temporarily short-
ductor elements on the PC boards. ed, walk about 10 or 15 feet away from the
front of the transmitter carrying the re-
Optical Alignment. Hold each unit in the ceiver. Turn on the receiver and point it
beam path of a relatively distant light source. toward the transmitter, varying the aim until
DON'T use the sun for this step-a common you hear the tone. You will notice the ex-
light bulb about 10 feet away will do. Align treme directionality of the system. This is
the chassis so that the light falls on the what makes it so private-you must be on
window of the active optical element. Move the beam to get the signal. In daylight, the
the PC board back and forth until the light range will not be as great, but it can be im-
comes to a sharp focus on the element win- proved by switching the receiver Day -Night
dow. Once this position has been located, switch (S2) to the Night position. If you
lock the mounting screws; and, though it is find the tight beam too constraining, you
not necessary, place a spot of cement on the can de-focus the receiver by moving the PC
screws to insure permanence. Once both board slightly in toward the lens. One side
units have been aligned optically, check effect of doing this is a reduction in range.
that the batteries are firmly mounted and
assemble the chassis covers. Operation. If you are using a pair of com-
You can simplify the optical alignment municators as a network, the transmitter at
process by using a small phosphor screen one end should be aimed at the receiver of

1-R9- ,dos --R6-de

1-C6-_1
F--RII-- yQ6--R13-
Ill -- RIO -i
-R12- ---R14-1
+ 1-- C T------
1

-+
COMT DAYi !NIGHT I +

Fig. 4. When mounting Q1 make sure win- \-S2 JI

dow is facing component side of PC board. I I f

BI
Connect collector to foil going to R3 and SI
9V
Q1, emitter to common foil near Q1 hole.

112 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 ADJUSTABLE
SPACERS

Like transmitter, assemble receiver board on four adjustable spacers so

window of Q1 is at focus of lens. Be sure batteries do not obstruct light.

the other end and the transmitter Test but- Opticom's range, are available from Ed-
ton pushed to tone -modulate the transmitter. mund Scientific Co. (150 Edscorp Bldg.,
Both ends should be positioned until the Barrington, N.J. 08007).
tone at each end is heard loud and clear. The Opticom system may also be used as
Once the link has been established, the push- a short -distance rangefinder. Mount a bi-
button is released and the microphone is cycle reflector on the target and aim the
used for speech communication. Manipula- tone -modulated transmitter at it. From a
tion of the receiver Day -Night switch (S2) short distance away from the transmitter,
will affect the range and volume. aim the receiver at the reflector until the
transmitter tone can be heard. The trans-
Modifications. There are numerous modi- mitter, target and receiver should form a
fications and variations that can be used triangle. Once the tone has been heard,
with the Opticom. Telescopes or binoculars simple geometry can be used to solve the
at either, or both ends greatly increase the triangle and calculate the distance.
range. Even low-cost plastic Fresnel lenses One simple way to improve the night
may be used. Since the light collecting area range of the Opticom is to mount a small
of 'a circular lens is proportional to the filament of LED light source inside the
square of the diameter, a small increase in receiver housing. By controlling the bright-
diameter results in a significant increase in ness of this light, the phototransistor can
the effective area. For example, a lens three be externally biased into a better operating
inches in diameter has more than twice the region, thus greatly increasing its sensitivity.
light collecting area of a two-inch lens. To see how this works, shine a flashlight
Since a diverging beam of light follows an toward the receiver lens during a short-range
inverse square law and produces a light test in darkness.
energy density dependent on the square of Daylight range can be improved if the
the distance from the light source, doubling interior of the receiver chassis is painted flat
the lens light area will, in theory, double the black. Also, a long focal plane lens can be
range of the Opticom. Of course, operation used to narrow the field of view and reduce
in daylight or over paths having varied background illumination. This tightens the
thermal conditions will limit the range. beam and makes more accurate alignment
Longest ranges can be obtained on clear, necessary. Also consider the use of a black
cool nights, with a telescope at each end. A interior tube or shield protruding from the
large variety of optical devices and com- lens to reduce ambient light to the photo-
ponents, ideal for use it) improving the transistor. 0.
1974 Spring Edition 113
 Build
Un
Impedance
Meter
MEASURE IMPEDANCE

FROM ONE OHM

TO ONE MEGOHM BY CHARLES D. RAKES

ubiquitous volt -ohmmeter (VOM ) The only component that cannot he tested
THE
can be used to make all kinds of re- is a capacitor.
sistance measurements, but it is an abject
failure when it comes to measuring imped- Circuit Operation. Transistor Ql and its
ances. In fact, most hobbyists and techni- associated components form a simple 1 -kHz
cians reach a dead end when they have to phase -shift oscillator that is buffered by Q2.
measure an impedance. There is no way to The output of Q2 is taken from the level
determine the impedance of a speaker, a control, R9, and applied to the primary of
transformer, an RL or RC network, etc. Tl. Transistor Q3 is connected as a constant
The Impedance Meter, whose schematic current source, and its output (collector) is
is shown in Fig. 1, includes five impedance coupled to ICl, an op amp circuit having a
ranges from zero to 100, 1000, 10,000, 100,- high input impedance and a gain of about
000, and 1,000,000 ohms. The measure- 10. The next stage is 1C2, connected as an
ments are made at 1 kHz and the readout is ac voltmeter.
a relatively large 0-100 linear -scale meter. The output voltage of the constant cur-
The device is battery operated and costs rent source depends on the values of the
about $35. collector and emitter resistors. The base is
The only restriction in using the meter is held at a fixed voltage by zener diode DI.
that the dc resistance path through the re- When an unknown resistance or reactance is
active component under test must be equal connected to JI and J2, the amount of volt-
to or less than, the full-scale value of the age developed across it is read on the ac
range used to make the measurement. This voltmeter.
restriction has never interfered with any
impedance testing to date because, if a com- Construction. Any type of construction
ponent is to be classified as reactive, it must can be used; but if you want to use a printed
have a higher impedance than the dc path. circuit board (the best way), the foil pat -
114 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 td

vr.

ó
N
U0
.O
z

ótia-oÿ2.,,"',
ÿ.2.`^ HÓ.NrhhNh
C ..
tl d

4
C-.Ñ
o 0-C o o
.Ó-vÿb-C
a-C..C .tlÓÓ
tln
E
pn
ÿÓÓ
00
OÔ
ÿMy tl00ao
tl C
MM Óc`70 o-tlbCryúMMM^,
aa` a"
a+
aa0
M
C

áó v,-N,iÑti
I

I I 1

.ÿ
1^'7,QQM 1
1
1

o
E

H
o- o

AI

20

NO
2N
WNW,
jr20
gro

-
O
J a
m
+ KMY--% XO

mm ó a
2Af
F- y
Q

Otl

eo

- -
'YAWN
2M ti--, 0O ÿ0.O..
.. CO
-L .....1
C
j+
O

r.`'. M iÔ
M
.°'..
2 "Ó22Ó.
v m
/1!1 v
^ ¢"' n

noo
UN
1 Id
/j
VV~~ Z
,n

bti
ñ G I

2 O tlOÇO00cvj0
Oltiofh VO
20a0O
Up mñ
,'I
SCViC-rf
q.ry

+I ?
O O O

11:

1974 Spring Edition 115

 L^
tern and component layout are shown in switch S3, and two connectors should he
Fig. 2. The housing for the prototype is mounted on the front panel. Mount the cir-
shown in the photo; but this is not essential. cuit board on spacers and use appropriate
The meter, the range selector switch Si. the holders for the batteries. The value of R26
calibrate switch S2, control R9, the power is selected in the calibration procedure.

116 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 1

1 §
R26
8 R24
+9V -6,e1 + +

R23
1
R22
I R25
C2 CII
R21
-BATT
COM

40- C 9 --e>,,A RI
1

i 1
CI
C12 -- C6 C3
R2 R3
11
02

S2B- R9

-
I
RIO
Q3
O°1 -9V

S2A_-
JI R15
I,R13
t
RII R20 RIB
i 1

RI6 C7
TI
en
TI
500.0
je
1

R4 C4
11
1

R7 R6
i
C5

IiII
R114 I R12r I R1+9 R17r
-R5-
I

II_.j_I
SIB SIA
S2A R9 SIA

Fig. 2. The actual size foil pattern for a PC board is shown on facing page,
while component layout is above. Perf board construction may also be employed.

Calibration. With all wiring checked, sistor may provide false indications (not the
connect a 10 -volt dc voltmeter between the same as the value marked on the resistor)
common and pin 6 of ICI. With the power because of the reactance of the windings.
turned on, the meter can indicate either To check speaker impedances, set SI to
positive or negative at this point. Connect a the lowest range. Use the same range for
resistance decade box between the R26 ter- headphones and switch to higher ranges if
minals on the board and start with a resis- necessary.
tance of 100,000 ohms. Increase this value When testing transformers, load the sec-
until the dc voltmeter indicates zero. Select ondary with the required resistance (to sim-
a standard resistor nearest to the decade - ulate the load) and read the reflected im-
box value, and use this for R26. The voltage pedance on the meter.
at pin 6 should be less than 1 volt. If you suspect a shorted turn in a choke,
Connect a 10,000 -ohm resistor between transformer, speaker coil, or motor winding,
Ji and J2, and connect a scope in parallel the impedance meter can be used to verify
with this resistor. Set R9 about of the way your suspicion since even one shorted turn
toward maximum and put the range switch can cause the impedance of a normally high
on RX100. Adjust R8 (on the board) for impedance to show some low value-near
the maximum peak -to -peak undistorted sine the do resistance.
wave. Remove the scope and test resistor. Either RL or RC networks can be
Depress the calibration switch and adjust checked easily but make sure there are no
R9 for a full-scale meter indication. Check series capacitors in the circuit.
each range of Si and note that a full-scale The first four ranges can be made as ac-
indication is obtained. If not, R8 may have curate as you wish by calibration (taking
to be re-adjusted. into account the tolerance of the meter and
of the calibration resistors) . The upper
Applications. Any value of precision re- range (one megohm) can have an error as
sistor (up to one megohm) can be used to large as 5% due to the input impedance of
check the various ranges. A wirewound re- IC1.
1974 Spring Edition 117
 TACH-DWELL METER ONE LOW-COST IC DOES DOUBLE DUTY
BY NORMAN J. OLSEN

U SING only one low-cost digital IC, it is Calibration. To calibrate the dwell scale,
easy to construct a compact instrument Set Sl to position 3 and, with the two in-
that can measure both rpm and dwell angle put leads shorted, adjust R.3 for a full-scale
of an internal combustion engine. Use of a deflection. This represents the angular dis-
simple equation then permits rpm calibra- tance between the lobes of the distributor
tion of almost any type of engine at any cam shaft; i.e. 45° for an eight -cylinder en-
rpm. gine (60° for six cylinders; 90° for four).
As shown below, gates A and B are For the tachometer scale, determine the
connected as a one-shot multivibrator with desired full-scale (in rpm) indication. By
R5 and C2 used as the timing elements. As multiplying the rpm by the number of
the engine operates, the distributor points cylinders and dividing by 120, you will
open and close, causing the one-shot to find the audio frequency required. For ex-
generate fixed amplitude pulses with a repe- ample, assume a speed of 1000 rpm for an
tition rate that is a function of the engine 8 -cylinder engine. The frequency is 66.67
rpm. When Si is in position 2 (tach) , Hz (about 10 volts output) Select a value
.

these pulses are applied to gate D (the for R4 so that, with 66.67 Hz as an input,
meter driver). The large value of C3 in- the meter will indicate at the full-scale
tegrates the pulsating voltage so that it is mark. The same relationship can be used to
smooth with an amplitude proportional to determine the audio frequency required for
the pulse frequency-or engine rpm. intermediate rpm indications-or for other
When Si is in position 3 (dwell) , gate than 8 -cylinder engines.
C is used as a conventional inverter with
the pulses passed through Si to gate D. Installation. Connect the ground lead to
The pulses are integrated by C3 and the re- a suitable chassis ground on the vehicle.
sulting dc is read off on meter M/. The Use a length of insulated wire to connect
one-shot gates (A and B) are not used in the "dist" input to the non -grounded con-
this mode. nector on the distributor points. Be sure
DI
that this lead is kept away from moving or
'IIN914 high -temperature engine components. The
C2 meter itself can be mounted in any con-
venient, visible place. Q.
Circuit can be built on PC or perf
RI board and enclosed in a plastic box.
471(
DIST R5
R2
10K i+C 20K PARTS LIST
GND .IyF
o
C3
RI-Two 1.5 -volt D cells
2500F C1 -0.1-µF, 400 -volt capacitor
C2 -0.5-µF. 50 -volt capacitor
C3 -250-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor
D1 --Diode (HEP156 or 1N914)
ICI-Integrated circuit (HEP570 or MC -
724P)
NI1-0-1-mA meter

- BI
3V
I2 ¡PIA

1
3 T
RI -17.000 -ohm, 1/, -watt resistor
R2 -10,000 -ohm, 1, -watt resistor
R3 -10,000 -ohm potentionmeter
R4-See text
SIC
R4 R3
R.5 -20,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor

OFF
1

2 3
'DWELL
(SEE
TEXT) IOK S1-Three-pole, three -position rotary switch
Misc.-Suitable enclosure, battery holder, in-
TACH)
sulated cable for distributor connection.

118 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 BUILD THE

SURF BY JOHN S. SIMONTON, JR.

SYNTHESIZER
REPRODUCE THE SOUND OF BREAKERS AGAINST THE SHORE

ONE of the most relaxing sounds imagin- (VCF); voltage -controlled attenuator
able is the roar of the surf. From Presi- (VCA) ; and random voltage generator.
dents on down, anyone who is close enough, The noise source (Q7) is built around a
and has the time, heads for the seashore reverse biased pn junction operating above
when he wants to unwind. But what is really its breakdown potential. The shot noise re-
nice is to have the sound of the surf always sulting from the avalanche breakdown mech-
available at the flick of a switch-and now anism is amplified by Q8.
you can. \\'ith a "Surf Synthesizer," you can Control voltage for the VCF and VCA
turn your home into an apartment at Malibu originate in the random voltage generator
Beach. which consists of three astable multi -vibra-
The Surf Synthesizer is actually a special- tors (Q1 -Q6) running at different rates and
purpose electronic music synthesis system with different duty factors. The three out-
which operates through your hi-fi amplifier. puts are summed and appear across R18.
White noise is generated by an inexpensive While the voltage across R18 is to a certain
silicon transistor and voiced by a voltage - extent random, it is weighted by the differ-
controlled, low-pass filter and attenuator ent periods and duty factors of the astables
under the control of a random voltage gener- and the different values of the summing
ator. resistor to approximate the "roll" of the
ocean.
Design Analysis. A complete schematic of If there is a secret to the Surf Synthesizer,
the Surf Synthesizer is shown in Fig. 1, but it is in the VCF (DI) When the VCA is
.

it is convenient to break the unit down into disabled and only the VCF is operating, the
blocks as shown in Fig. 2. These are a noise sound is close to that of the surf even though
source; voltage -controlled, low pass filter there is no amplitude change. If, on the
1974 Spring Edition 119
 C15

R2 R4 R5 R7 R6 R8 RIO R12
OOK 6.8K 6.8K 47K 220K 6.8K IOOK 6.8K

+ + +
C3 C6
30yF 3OpF 30y6
03 04
2N5129 2N5129 2N5129

0,1
$jsjsj

RI4 R15
33K 10K

R16 R33
39K 68K
C8
0yF IOyF
TI07

R24
IK 224F
R25
68K

C12
R27
I0K
1829
47K
830
68K

C14
.225F
BI
9V -
SIT\
02
IN914 JI
C11-1 VCA our
c10 .054F
.005
yF
5 9V-
B2

01
IN914
R22 R34 VCF
100.11. 50K R23
47K
R26 R28 R31
C13 68K 33K 68K
2.2y

Fig. 1. The three astable multivibrators develop a composite vol-

tage that controls both the voltage -controlled filter (VCF) and the
voltage -controlled attenuator (VCA) to form the sound of the surf.

PARTS LIST
B1,B2-9-volt battery R15,R27-10,000-ohm, I2 -watt resistor'
C1,C6-30-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor R16 -39,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor
C7 -100-µF, 16 -volt electrolytic capacitor R18-4700 -ohm, 's-wrut resistor
C8 -10-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor R19,R20-1-megohrn. 12 -watt resistor
C9 -0.1-µF disc capacitor R22 -100 -ohm, 12 -watt resistor
C10 -0.005-µF disc capacitor R24 -1000 -ohm, 's -watt resistor
C11 -0.05-µF disc capacitor R32 -470 -ohm, 12 -watt resistor
(:12,C14.-0.22-µF llylar capacitor R34,R.35 50,000 -ohm trimmer potentiometer
C13 -2.2-µF, 16 -roll electrolytic capacitor SI-Spst switch
C15 -1000-µF, 10 -volt electrolytic capacitor Misc-Case, connectors, battery
battery
D1,D2-1N94 diode (or similar) clamps, output jack. wire, solder, hardware,
Q1 -Q6 -2N5129 transistor etc.
Q7,Q8-2N2712 transistor Note-The following are available from
R1,R4,R5,R8,R9,R12-6800-ohm, 1/2 -watt re- PAIA Electronics. P.O. Box 14.359, Okla-
sistor homa City, OK 7.3116: etched circuit board
R2,R10,R21-100,000-ohm, ? -watt resistor #3711 pc at 5.3.00 postpaid; kit of parts with
R3 -330,000 -ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor* circuit board and selected transistor for Q7,
R6 -220.000-ohm, 1/2 -watt resistor but less batteries and case #3711K at
R7,R17,R23,R29--47,000-ohm, 1'2 -watt resis- .$1.95 plus postage for 1 lb; case #.37110
tor at 32.50 with kit order.
Rl1,R25,R26,R30,R31,R33-68,000-ohm, 1/2 -
watt resistor *If the surf sound is not natural enough, try
R13 -22,000 -ohm, 1A -watt resistor changing R.3 to 270.000 ohms, R14 to
R14,R28-33,000-ohm, %/-watt resistor* 22,000 and R15 to 15,000.

120 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 RANDOM
VOLTAGE RI7
GENERATOR
01-06
Fig. 2. Block diagram shows how ran-
dom signal is filtered and level con-
trolled by integrated random voltages
NOISE
GENERATOR
from three sets of multivibrators.
07

other hand, the VCA is working alone, the Capacitor C12 blocks de from the VCF and
result only sounds like interstation radio does not noticeably contribute to the overall
static fading in and out. frequency response.
The VCF uses the nonlinear V -I charac-
teristic of a conventional silicon diode as a Construction. Since there are no very high
voltage -controlled resistor. By proper ad- frequencies involved and parts placement is
justment of R34, diode DI is ordinarily not critical, any method of construction may
forward biased, resulting in a loss of high be used. An etched circuit hoard will make
frequencies through C11, Dl, and C13. As the job easier, however. If you decide to use
the control voltage of the VCF increases, it a board, the foil pattern is given in Fig. 3.
reverse biases Dl and allows less high -fre- Component layout is also shown in Fig. 3.
quency loss to ground. The high frequencies Leave transistors Q7 and Q8 till the last;
not shunted to ground naturally become part their selection and installation are explained
of the output signal. later. Be sure to get polarized components
The operation of the VCA is similar to properly installed and use a heat sink on the
that of the VCF. Diode D2 is in series with semiconductor leads when soldering. In fact,
the signal and is slightly reverse biased by it is good practice to save the installation of
R35. As the control voltage applied to the all semiconductors for last so that the heat
anode of D2 increases, its effective resistance from soldering adjacent components does
becomes less, allowing more signal to pass. not damage them.

Fig. 3. Actual size foil pattern and

component layout. Take care when in-
stalling semiconductors, diodes, etc.
See text before installing Q7 and Q8.

06 C
C C
t 06 OOá00 Q5 04 Q3 02 Ol

+ 0

t
C]5
RSt teR14r

2
Rjjjj7 2 Kn
R7 R6

C2
1
t to
1111
r R13e

24
l1i
t!

ït,71tlTQ
'.4bg
R28 R35
R26
C13
R34
71,
I

1974 Sorina Edition 121

 When all of the components except Q7 from the amplifier. If you don't, unsolder
and Q8 have been installed, connect the Q7 and Q8 (being careful to avoid over-
positive lead of one of the battery con- heating) and interchange them. When you
nectors to the circuit board point marked are sure that Q7 has been properly selected,
"+" and the negative lead of the other solder it and Q8 permanently in place.
to point "G". Solder the remaining lead This is a good time to check the volt-
from each connector to either side of ages at the collectors of Q2, Q4, and
switch S7. Also connect the output jack to Q6 to make sure that all three astables
points "A" and "G" with wires that will be are operating. Usc any CTV\I set to a
long enough to reach from the location 20 -to -25 -volt scale. The voltage on the
collector should go from about ii to 17
volts and have a period of several seconds.
The Surf Synthesizer may be housed in
any convenient case. In the prototype, the
case was made of sheet aluminum folded
into a U measuring about 5" X 2'_" X 334".
The ends of the U were sealed with walnut
blocks having a rabbet cut around each
edge. The ends are held in place by #4
wood screws through the aluminum. Holes
were cut in the back of the case to pro-
vide clearance for the output jack and the
power switch. The battery clips were glued
to the top of the channel.
The circuit board was fastened to the
aluminum bottom plate with 4-40 hard-,
ware and !4" standoffs. The bottom plate
was fastened to the wooden ends with #4
screws.

Setup and Operation. The only adjust-

ments to lie made on the Surf Synthesizer
Interior view of author's prototype are the settings of R34 and R3.5. While
shows method of mounting boards and these settings are largely a matter of per-
location of both of the 9-V batteries.
sonal preference, a couple of tips will get
you started.
of the jack to the circuit board when it is Connect the Synthesizer to an ampli-
installed in the case. fier and turn both on. With R35 set fully
To select Q7 and Q8, remember that not clockwise, adjust R34 for the widest and
every 2N2712 breaks down when its base - most natural sounding tone changes. When
emitter junction is reverse biased with 18 you are satisfied with the adjustment of the
volts. However a piece -by -piece survey of tone control, you can set R35 for volume
over 5000 transistors indicated that approx- changes. You will probably find that the
imately 80% of them were suitable for use most natural sound results when the Synthe-
as a noise source. Since two of these tran- sizer is completely muted for short periods
sistors are used in the synthesizer, there's of time. There is little electrical interaction
a good chance that one can be used for between, R35 and R34, but it will probably
Q7. Arbitrarily select Q7 and Q8 and take some twiddling before you are com-
lightly solder them in place. Note that the pletely satisfied with their adjustments.
collector of Q7 is not connected to any Bear in minci that the quality of the
point in the circuit. Rotate R34 and R3.5 amplifier used with the Synthesizer will
fully clockwise as viewed from the nearest greatly affect the final sound. Use an ampli-
edge of the board. Run a jumper from the fier with the best bass response available
output jack to the low-level input of a hi- so that the "roar" of the surf can be heard
fi or instrument amplifier and adjust the as well as the crescendo -like crash as the
amplifier's gain about midway. Install two waves break. It will probably be necessary
9 -volt batteries in the Synthesizer and turn to advance the bass boost of the amplifier
on SI. You should hear a rushing sound to achieve a really natural sound. O
122 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
BUILD AN

Electronic Clinical Thermometer

BY J. R. LAUGHLIN

T11E OLIN n rcury-glass thermometers

ip probe is considerably less than that of a
that we hay all used for so long have conventional glass clinical thermometer and
many disadvantages They have to be shaken is thus less uncomfortable for the patient.
down before each use, they're hard to read, The probe is difficult to damage by accident-
and they are all too easily broken. Modern ally biting. Its small size also allows it to
electronic technology now permits us to respond rapidly to temperature changes and
build a small, portable, self -powered, elec- the low thermal mass of the housing does
tronic thermometer that provides a tempera- not affect the environment of the surround-
ture indication in about 30 seconds, is easy ings when temperature is being taken.
to read, and is practically indestructible. Thermistors generally have better long-
Temperature is seised by a tiny precision term stability than thermocouples, and they
thermistor mounted in a small metal enclo- tend to become more stable with age. In one
sure and connected to the electronics and in- test, thermistors varied in temperature indi-
dicating unit through a length of very flex- cation by only 0.03°C per year, over a 12 -
ible cable. The diameter of the thermistor year period. The resistance value, at any
1974 Spring Edition 123
 DI 01
.510.-41111'
el
PARTS LIST
IN5297 2113390 ISV
BI-15 -volt battery (Eveready 411 or similar)
C1 -0.05 -µF,20 -volt ceramic capacitor
Dl-Constant-current diode (Motorola IN -
5297)
R6
5.6K
D2,D3-Silicon rectifier diode (1N4001 or
CI similar)
.O5yr
JI-Phono jack
M1 -50-µA meter (Calectro D1-910 or simi.
R4 lar)
2 I
P1-Plug to mate with J1
R7 R2 1R3 Q1 -2N3390 transistor
2K clon
2K 03 CAL: R1 -100 -ohm. PC -type trimming potentiom-
eter (Spectrol 34-3-8 or similar)
S2A See R2-2000 -ohm, PC -type trimming potentiom-
eter (Spectrol 84-3-8 or similar)
MI R3 -910 -ohm, 1% resistor
SoyA R4 -1000 -ohm, 1% resistor
RI
RS
loon R5 -400,000 -ohm, 1/4W, 5% resistor
500K
ZERO R6 -5600 -ohm, 5% resistor
R7 -2000 -ohm, 1% resistor
R8 -3000 -ohm at 25° C, 1% thermistor (Yel-
low Springs Instrument 44005 or similar)
SI-Spst normally open pushbutton switch
(Switch craft 903 or similar)
RS S2-Dpdt pushbutton switch (Switchcraft FF -
1006 or similar)
E
Misc.-Plastic case (4" x 3" x 11/2", Calectro
¡4.725 or similar), length of two -conduc-
Fig. 1. Thermometer is essentially Wheat- tor cable (RG -174U, Belden 8216, or simi-
stone bridge powered by regulated battery lar), press -on type, heat shrinkable tub-
power supply. Potentiometer R5 is used to ing, spaghetti tubing, battery clip, wire,
set meter to full scale with a new battery. etc.

given temperature, for the thermistor used mometer circuit is shown in Fig. 1. It can be
in the thermometer is accurate to less than constructed on a small PC board (see Fig.
1%. This tolerance represents less than 2) and mounted directly on the meter
0.18°F variation in temperature indication, terminals. The two large holes shown in the
which permits the use of any number of foil pattern should be drilled just to fit the
probes interchangeably. meter terminals without sliding around.
Very carefully remove the cover of the
Construction. A schematic of the ther- meter to expose the scale. Place the meter
JI/ S2
WIPER BI- 52 SI S2 S2 WIPER

1 l l 1 1

R5
r R7 R4

1 11
41,»RIi 4-R2-

6- R3

--03--+
MI
t- - 02-- 9
MI

,+ .-oe-a+
--i
CI
R6 .

Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern and component

installation. Board mounts on meter terminals. 01

144 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 Completed thermometer fits in small plastic case, with battery. Note that
meter is mounted in "bottom" of case to allow access when cover is lifted.

movement in a dust -free enclosure while interfere with the circuit board. Also locate
modifying the scale. Using a light eraser, a suitable spot for the battery clip and
remove the numerals and the small division mount it.
markers, leaving only the six large division To make the probe, obtain approximately
markers. Using India ink and ruling equip- two feet of light, flexible two -conductor
ment, add five matching division markers cable (RG -174U or similar) and terminate
exactly between the six original markers. one end with a plug that matches the jack
This results in ten equal divisions across on the case. Cut a piece of slender alumi-
the scale, each indicating one degree num tubing just large enough in diameter
Fahrenheit. Using some form of press -on to allow the thermistor and connections to
type, mark the left-hand marker 96. Num- be inserted. The edges of the tube should
ber every other mark as shown in the pho-
tograph. Place a small dot over the 100
mark to indicate the battery cutoff voltage
and draw a red line at 98.6 to indicate CAUTION
"normal" temperature. A "TEMP °F" nota- Great care must be exercised in fabri-
cating the thermistor probe. A non-toxic
tion can be added below the scale if de- epoxy must be used to keep the thermis-
sired. Reassemble the scale and meter, tor in place (particularly at the lead end
taking care that the zero screw engages of the thermistor); and the user must be
the proper slot in the movement. cautioned not to bite or break the tube
The thermometer can be assembled in a while it is in the mouth. Excessive strain
small plastic instrument case measuring should not be placed on the thermistor
4" X 3" X 13z " with the meter mounted on leads. Some people are allergic to the
the bottom of the case so that the rest of epoxy that covers the thermistor and can
the assembly can be reached by removing develop a rash when this chemical comes
in contact with the sensitive areas within
the cover. You can dress up the unit by re-
the mouth.
moving the feet on the bottom of the case Cleanliness is as important in the use
and covering it with Contact paper. Once of this thermometer as it is with any other
the meter is secured, fit the PC board in clinical instrument. Always sterilize the
place and locate the holes for the two probe (with alcohol) before each use.
switches and probe jack. They must not
1974 Spring Edition 125
 HOW IT WORKS superior to a zener regulator in two respects:
The circuit is essentially a Wheatstone regulation is better especially as the battery
I

Bridge powered by a well -regulated supply. voltage approaches the cutoff point) and it
The resistance values for the two legs of the does not require a minimum current to func-
bridge were selected to produce a linear out- tion with a low dynamic resistance.
put of desired amplitude fur the temperature Operation of the regulator is based on the
range covered. constant -current diode. The latter is actually
Resistor R7 is connected in series with the a FET transistor with the gate connected in-
thermistor (R8) to form a voltage divider ternally to the source. It is carefully selected
which is one arm of the bridge. The voltage to obtain the most desirable characteristics.
at the junction of these two components is a The constant -current diode functions in a
function of the resistance value of the ther- manner just the opposite of the zener diode.
mistor, which vagies with the temperature. Instead of maintaining a constant voltage
This voltage is applied to the negative term- drop, it maintains a constant current for a
inal of the meter. The other arm of the bridge wide range of impressed voltages. A resistor
ebnsists of resistors Rl, R3, and R4, with the connected in series with the diode (R6) then
voltage at the junction of R3 and R4 capable has a constant voltage across it. In the ther-
of being set to equal exactly the voltage at mometer, this voltage is 5.6 volts, which is ap-
the meter negative terminal when the ther- plied to Ql. The latter is connected as an
mistor probe is at 96°F. In this condition, no emitter follower to supply power to the cir-
current flows through the meter and it in- cuit. The circuit not only provides excellent
dicates at the left end of the scale. regulation, but draws only about 1 milli-
As the thermistor temperature increases, ampere. Capacitor Cl insures that the tran-
the voltage at the meter negative terminal sistor will not oscillate, which may he a
goes down with respect to that at the positive problem with high -gain transistors.
terminal which is fixed by the resistor network. Diodes D2 and D3 protect the meter from
A probe temperature of 106°F produces a excessive voltages when the unit is operated
voltage difference sufficient to deflect the meter without the probe or with a shorted probe.
full scale. Precise adjustment is made with Voltage across the meter is limited to 0.6 volt.
R2. Resistor R5 is used to test the battery by
A well -regulated supply is mandatory for causing a full-scale indication for 20 volts.
accuracy even though the battery voltage The battery should be replaced when it falls
drops with use. The regulator circuit used is to 8 volts.

be slightly rounded at each end. If you are and connections into the aluminum tubing
using RG -174U cable, trim back the outer with the aluminum just touching or slightly
plastic cover and the braid for about two covering the spaghetti. Flow epoxy into
inches. The insulated center lead of the the space between the thermistor and tub-
cable is connected to one thermistor lead ing and allow to harden. Use an abrasive
(cut very short and insulated) while the paper to make the completed probe smooth.
other thermistor lead is brought down the
outside and connected to the braid. Slide a Calibration. To calibrate the electronic
length of spaghetti tubing down this pair thermometer, you will need an accurate
until it contacts the braid. Use a small piece bulb -type thermometer. Adjust the meter
of heat -shrinkable tubing to secure the zero screw until the needle is directly on
spaghetti in place. Insert the thermistor the 96 mark. Fill a large pot with water
and heat to a temperature slightly over
96°F. Remove the heat, place the probe
and bulb thermometer in the water, in close
ALUMINUM CABLE LEADS
TUBE proximity, and stir the water continuously.
When the water cools to exactly 96°F as
R8 indicated by the bulb thermometer, adjust
Rl so that the meter indicates exactly 96.
SPAGHETTI Heat the water to slightly above 106°F,
keep stirring and turn off the heat. When
the water cools down to exactly 106, adjust
Care must be taken when making up probe. R2 to obtain this indication on the meter.
Use non-toxic glue to mount thermistor in As the water continues to cool, check the
aluminum tube. Note "Caution" on page 125. mid -scale marks. O
126 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 Build DICI -VIEWER
AUTOMATIC IN -OPERATION TESTING OF DIGITAL IC'S
BY DON LANCASTER

THAT OLD BUGABOO, testing in -circuit the Digi-Viewer and the faulty circuit can
digital IC's, has finally been conquered be located at once.
for the experimenter/technician (assuming The Digi-Viewer can be used on any 14 -
he's tired of one -lamp probes and can't af- or 16 -pin dual in -line package, including
ford a complex computer system) The . RTL, DTL, TTL, and most of the newer
Digi-Viewer, which can be built for under \IOS types. Due to the extremely low
$20, is a simple visual display that indi- loading factor, there is no need to worry
cates immediately the state of every stage about overloading the IC. By substituting
of an IC while it is operating in the circuit. an IC in a circuit that is known to be good
The Digi-Viewer consists of 16 indicator (using a socket), you can perform use tests
lamps driven by 16 Darlington pair transis- and find out if the IC is good or not.
tor amplifiers. When these circuits are at-
tached to the pins of an IC through a Construction. The schematic of the Digi-
special clip -on connector, the lamps light or Vicwer is shown in Fig. 1. The diodes, re-
don't light depending on whether the po- sistors, and transistors are mounted on a
tential on the respective pin is over or printed circuit board as shown in Fig. 2.
under 1.4 volts-thus indicating the "on" As showmen, the Digi-Viewer is designed to
or "off" logic state. To identify which lights handle 16 -pin IC packages. If you have no
are which far specific IC's, a transparent need fur the 16 -pin version, two of the
overlay of the circuit arrangement is slipped Darlington circuits (at one end) and their
between the rows of lights on the top of associated lamps may be omitted.
1974 Spring Edition
 Any type of chassis may be used; the can also outline the lamps with an IC
prototype was built in a 6" X 4r X 2W' layout, being sure to include the notch be-
cabinet. The important thing is the place- tween pin 1 and pin 14. Use permanent
ment of the lamps on the top surface. Space black ink.
the lamps on 3i" centers with the two rows With the lamps installed, solder one end
134" apart. Drill the lamp holes just large of each lamp to the common ground solder
enough for a press fit with the lamp assem- pad on the foil pattern. Then, being very
bly. Determine which way the display is careful, solder the other leads to their re-
to be observed and make a conspicuously spective solder pads that are connected to
large dot at the number 1 lamp (pin). You the transistors. Looking down on the board,

m J
U
U

o
Óz
CO a
a.0
erg
. .Ñ ú
ÿ r tl
i
5ó
z
oo
z v:re 0. C
tl d
CV-y

tG Ú td w;?:,
C
î
V
.p y O C
o
a.
I- Ú
T] d C ODv

mº..> timO 0.b

(i)
J V
u
C O
ÿ.d
a0.
fn

Q
a jh
:21

OvC .O, Ó
.0 h d
a
"1V;,z -O

-"3-"''
d
ÿ
ti C
Ó
O
h
C C
y"'

Cry'-p y C
ÿ;hN
` I..aaN
o I

Zcz,
tdÓ
CCrcv h
I
C l\
I.,.Y \-- e
;
Or
ó
C. CAC.O,ó
s

..ád"cº'.eó3-
..,

I
__
C' c tl

C.) U Q7-2

128 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 I !NIP! 11 1 11 °

4?,q, eli 4?.1 «?.

, " p, s,

T/
r=
glghktEgE,E LAMP
C OM

.t y,f.tufl 1 1

FROM
CABLE
Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern (above)
and component installation (left) for a
16 -terminal tester. If you need only 14
TYPICAL
I 1 1 I
FOR terminals, two end circuits are removed
16 PLACES and two leads taken from 16 -lead cable.
1 1 I

R16 R15 R14 R13 R12 RII RIO R 9

(Thncnnnn
I 1 1 I 1 I I
6.3V

TICT
6.3V
Cnnonnnn
LAMP
TO JI --1
01
D2
E

6
C

UUUU 01-
032

i 1 i 1 1

RI R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 RB
1 1 1 1
I l

note that the transistor arrangement fol- the printed circuit board on four spacers.
lows the pin arrangement of an in -line IC. Connect the 16 -lead flat input cable to
Mount the transformer on one wall of the the input terminals on the circuit board,
chassis, and connect the three secondary making sure that, when it comes to solder-
leads to their appropriate pads on the ing the cable to the clip on the other end,
board. Connect the primary to switch Si you can identify and arrange the leads cor-
mounted on the top of the tester. Use a rectly. There must be a pin -for -pin corre-
strain relief or rubber grommet where the spondence between the lamps on the board
line cord goes through the chassis. Mount and the clip. (If you are using only 14
1974 Sparing Edition 129
 Connection to each lamp driver
is made on the foil side of the
board. The use of PC board ter-
minals is optional as leads can
be soldered directly to the foil.

pins, two leads may be removed from the the IC. Just open the test clip with a little
cable.) Drill a hole and fit it with a grom- pressure at the top end and fit it down over
met to hold the flat cable. Draw the cable the IC. On a 14 -pin inline IC, the two
through the hole in the chassis and connect right-hand clip connectors will he off the
it to the test clip. Identify pin 1 with a right side of the IC away from the locator
wearproof mark. Use small lengths of heat - notch or dot code.
shrinkable tubing at the clip end to im- The first thing to note is that operating
prove the looks, strengthen the cable termi- voltage is applied. to the IC. This is indi-
nation, and remove the probability of short cated by the lighting of the lamp at the
circuits. power supply pin. The ground lamp should
For high-speed logic systems, including not be lit. Now check that the input pins
TTL, the multi -lead cable should be less that could hold the IC at reset, zero or
than 2' long. Longer lengths are acceptable other state have the correct voltages on
for RTL, DTL, and MOS circuits. them to permit proper operation. Generally,
For the ground connection, use a con- RTL direct set, reset, and direct clear in-
ventional banana plug and jack with a piece puts are disabled by grounding, while their
of flexible wire 2 or 3 feet long. Terminate counterparts in TTL and DTL are made
the other end in a miniature alligator clip. positive to disable. There are enough ex-
The ground jack (JJ) is connected to both ceptions to this rule however that the ap-
the metal case and the PC board ground. propriate data sheets should always be on
Make up some plastic slides with cutouts hand to check any IC to be tested.
for the lamps so that they fit between the After checking the various conditions that
two rows of lamps. Mark the plastic (with
permanent ink or temporary grease pencil)
with the logic of the circuit to be tested.

Checkout and Use. With power supplied

to the w t, connect the ground clip to the
i

negative end of a 1.5-volt cell. As the posi-

tive end of the cell is connected to each pill
of the test clip (via a test lead) , the appro-
priate lamp should come on. The bulbs
must correspond to the clip terminals.
To use, snap the correct slide into
place and connect the ground clip to the
ground terminal of the circuit under test.
Connect the large test clip to the IC being Both power line and 16-lead cable are passed
tested, making sure that the locator dot at through metal chassis via rubber grommets,
pin one is correctly positioned on pin 1 of ground jack (J1) is positioned at center.

130 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 After wiring the 16 -lead cable
to the IC clamp, identify one
end pin of the clamp with a dot
to indicate pin 1. Make certain
that each terminal of clamp cor-
responds with a similar term-
inal on PC board. Heat shrink-
able tubing is used at cable -
clamp interface for protection.

could cause difficulties, the logic rules for rate by using an external oscillator so that
the IC should be verified. For example, on the indications become clear. A baunceless
an inverter, when the input lamp is on pushbutton may be used to "step" the logic
(signifying a positive input), the output manually, for a more detailed analysis.
lamp should be off (signifying a grounded While you will not be able to see such
output), and vice versa. If both lamps are things as a one-microsecond reset pulse,
on, the IC is bad or there is an open the indicator lamps connected to the flip-
ground. If both lamps are off, the IC is flop outputs will show the effect of such
bad or the output is shorted. In the case a pulse.
of a flip-flop, the output lamps should turn A few digital IC's have open collector
on and off at half the rate of the input circuits (readout drivers for example) An.

lamp. At high switching frequencies, the unused open collector in a system may
input and output lamps will all be on but never get to a high state and thus may
with partial illumination due to the high show an off condition on its lamp even
switching speed. Proportional brightness when the IC is perfectly good. If there is
can also be used as a relative indicator of no connection to these outputs, then a
the duty cycle of other "too fast to see" pullup resistor of about 2200 ohms to the
signals. The logic can he cycled at a slower circuit positive may be used. O

To use, simply affix the IC clamp to the IC under test making sure
that pin 1 of clamp is contacting pin 1 of the IC. Also make sure
that the tester ground lead is connected to the IC ground terminal.
1974 Spring Edition 131
 BUILD
THE

Time
Out
TURNS OFF CAR LIGHTS WHEN YOU'RE SAFELY INSIDE

BY JOHN STAYTON

T HERE ARE FEW things more aggra- Construction. There is nothing critical
vating to the motorist than pulling into about the circuitry of the Time Out (see
the driveway at night and having to stumble Fig. 1) and any method of construction may
around in the dark driveway to find the key be used. A printed circuit hoard like the one
for the garage or front door. Not only is it used in the prototype helps to produce a
inconvenient; it's unsafe if there is snow on sturdy compact unit and may be duplicated
the ground, or roller skates or bicycles lying using Fig. 2 as a guide. When installing the
around. semiconductors be sure you observe the
Wouldn't it be helpful if you could leave proper polarities and heat sink their leads
the headlights on for a while after getting while soldering.
out and not have to go back to turn them In the prototype, the circuit board and
off? With a "Time Out" you can do just that. relay are housed in a 3i " X 3" X 234" metal
When you have this device installed in your utility box. A barrier -type terminal strip
car, the headlights stay on after the ignition mounted on one end of the box is used to
is turned off and then go off automatically make connections to the automobile wiring.
after a predetermined period of time-from The circuit board is mounted on short spacers.
a few seconds to a couple of minutes. If you and is in such a position that the delay
always park in well -lighted areas at night, adjusting potentiometer (R9) is accessible
the Time Out comes in handy should you through a hole drilled in the case. Line this
forget to turn off your lights. hole with a rubber grommet to prevent short
The Time Out is easily constructed using circuits when making adjustments with a
readily obtainable parts and it is easy to metal screwdriver.
install in your car. When selecting a relay, don't scrimp on
132 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 TO
FROM LIHT
BAT SWITCH GND IGNITION
o

IGN

R7 1 RIO
OFF 4.7K 500K 2.2K

GND
KI SI ON R8
OA IOK

t010K
R2
100K
R3
330K A
2
03
2N2160
E
SORI
C106B2
G C Q2 04
2N21712 2N2712 2N2712

BI
R4
470 B

CI
.01
pF
2W
C2
1005F
6V
CO
E
RS
680
n
R6
100
11
+
C4
100pF
Co RII
10K

6V

HD'IN4001 1 C3
100pF
6V
D2
IN4001

Fig. 1. The UJT turns off the lights by making Q2 appear as a momentary short circuit
across SCR1. This causes the relay to open, removing power from lights and timer.
PARTS LIST
C1 -0.01µF capacitor R8,R11,-10,000-ohm 1.
C2,C3,C4-100-µF, 6-V electrolytic capacitor R10 -2200 -ohm 11-watt 10%r.
D1,D2-1N4001 diode R4 17 -ohm, 2 -watt resistor
K1 -6 -volt dpdt do relay, 10 -ampere con- R9 -500,000 -ohm potentiometer (printed cir-
tacts (see text) cuit board type)
Q1,Q2,Q4-2N2712 b'polar transistor SI-Spst slide switch
Q3 -2N2160 unijunction transistor SCR1-Silicon controlled rectifier (GE
R1,R2-100,000-ohm C106B2)
R3 -330,000 -ohm All resistors Misc.-Four-contact barrier strip, 33%" x 3"
R5 -680 -ohm 1/2 -watt, 10% x 21/8" metal utility box, rubber grommet,
R6 -100 -ohm spacers, mounting hardware, chassis let -
R7 -4700 -ohm tering, mounting hardware, etr.

HOW IT WORKS
When the circuit is in its normal, inopera- condition exists as long as the ignition
tive state, relay K1 is not energized and no switch is turned on. When it is turned off.
power is applied to either the timing circuit Q4 stops conducting and a charge builds up
or the headlights. Transistor Q1 conducts on C4 through R8 and R9. When the charge
because of the forward bias through R2. This on C4 is sufficiently high, Q3 starts to con-
holds the gate of SCR1 near ground poten- duct and a pulse is created on the hase of
tial. Q2, turning it on. With Q2 conducting, the
When the vehicle's headlight switch is anode of SCR1 is shorted to ground. Due to
closed the junction of RI and CI is the charge built up on C2, SCR1 is then
grounded through the lights and the charge reverse biased and turns off. The relay is
stored on CI creates a negative pulse to turn thus de -energized and the headlights are
off Q1 momentarily. With QI off, a voltage turned off.
is applied to the gate of SCR1 turning it on When the relay's contacts open, the junc-
and energizing the relay. Power is thus ap- tion of R1 and Cl is once again grounded
plied to the headlights and the rest of the through the lights and a pulse is created
timer circuit. which would begin the turn -on sequence
When the ignition switch is closed, the again if it were not for the charge stored
positive potential at the junction of RIO and on C3 when Q3 was conducting. This charge
R11 causes Q4 to conduct and disables the neutralizes the pulse and keeps QI from
timing circuit by shorting to ground the turning off. Diodes DI and D2 serve to keep
emitter of unijunction transistor Q3. This the proper polarities in the circuit.

1974 Spring Edition 133

Fig. 2. Actual size foil pattern (above)
and component installation (right) for
'- -RI
-R2--4) j
y
,.,,-,.,
DI
N IS- R9-41

the printed circuit board. Note polar- 1 -R3--

ities of semiconductors and capacitors. R4 7, c
ai of
E
Be

SCR
C R6
02 Be
4
*tC2 E
i

the current rating of the contacts. In the Installation. In selecting a location for the
prototype, both sets of 10 -ampere contacts Time Out in your car, bear in mind that you
were wired in parallel just to be on the safe may want to be able to reach the override
side. The same principle applies to the wire switch (SI) from time to time and that the
used to connect the relay contacts to the time delay will have to be adjusted when
terminal strip-don't use anything smaller you first set up the system.
than # 18 lamp cord or equivalent. The rest Electrical connections to the car are shown
of the wiring can be standard #22 hook-up in Fig. 3. Locate the lead from the car's light
wire. Be sure to leave enough slack in the switch to the battery and cut it. After splic-
wires between the circuit and the terminal ing lengths of lamp cord long enough to
strip to remove the case. reach the Time Out, connect the line which

Relay K1 and override switch

Si are mounted on the metal
chassis while the grommeted
hole allows screwdriver adjust-
ment of R9. Mount the PC
board on four rubber shock
absorbers to reduce vibration.

134 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

Fig. 3. Electrical connections for a CUT HERE

typical car are shown at the right.

PARKING
VEHICLE LIGHTS
BATTERY
VEHICLE
LIGHT HEAD
SWITCH LIGHTS

TAIL
LIGHTS

Fig. 4. When installed as shown in

diagram below, Time Out has no ef-
fect on brake lights or turn signals.

oY-; i
LIGHTS
i
TIME OUT

BAT LIGHT4,>
SWITCH
-4 -

o LIGHTS®

IGN®
GND

VEHICLE
IGNITION
SWITCH IGNITION

goes to the light switch to the terminal point such as under the head of an existing
marked LIGHTS on the timer. The wire that screw in the firewall or dashboard. The IGN
goes to the battery should be connected to terminal of the timer is connected to any
the BATTERY terminal on the timer. convenient point which is live only when
The GROUND terminal of the Time Out is the ignition is on-such as the radio or heat-
connected to any convenient ground er fan motor. In most cases, the Time Out
can be electrically connected at the vehicle
fuse block.

Operation. The Time Out does not inter-

fere with the vehicle's conventional lighting
and ignition systems. The lights should work
normally except that, when the light switch
is left on and the ignition is turned off, the
timer will hold the lights on for a length of
time depending on the setting of the timer
and then turn them off. Clockwise rotation
of the timer control (R9) increases the time
that the lights stay on.
When installed as shown in Fig. 4, the
Time Out will control both parking and
headlights but will not have any effect on
the brake lights, turn signals, or emergency
blinkers. For emergencies, turn Si on so that
the headlights will remain lit indefinitely
Connections to vehicle wiring are made via when the ignition is off. Be sure to turn Si
four -terminal barrier strip. Clearly identify ter- off when override control is no longer
minals to avoid wiring errors in installation. needed. O
1974 Spring Edition 135
 BuHd
the
Optimum
Fuzz
Adapter

THIS "TRIGGERED FUZZ" FOR YOUR GUITAR

REPRESENTS A BRAND NEW APPROACH

BY CRAIG ANDERTON

ZZadapters for guitars and other elec- As shown in Fig. 1, IC1 is connected as a
FI tronic instruments have been around for modified comparator that produces an out-
quite a while-in a variety of forms. Unfor- put only when the signal applied to its
tunately, when in use, some adapters suffer inverting input (-) is above a certain level.
from impaired clipping, noise, and feedback Below this level, the comparator automati-
problems that cause them to deliver a fuzz cally switches off and there is no output.
that is "dirtier" than desired. Provisions are made, through S2, to bypass
The "Optimum Fuzz" eliminates these the fuzz when desired.
problems since it comes into operation only
when triggered on by the electronic instru- Construction. The prototype was built on
ment; and it delivers an output that is al- a small piece of perf board using flea clips
most a square wave, which sounds much to hold the components. Alternately, a
fuzzier than the sound produced by con- printed circuit board could be designed to
ventional circuits. do the job. The board can be mounted in
136 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 PARTS LIST
B1 -9 -volt battery
C1,C2-0.1-µF disc capacitor
_ el C3,C4-15-µF (or greater) electrolytic
9V
capacitor
OUT si 1 IC1-741 compensated operational amplifier
S2A
IK
428
11,.12-Phono connector
OUT RS
RI -R4 -10,000 -ohm, 14 -watt resistor
SK R5-500,000-ohm linear potentiometer
LEVEL
R6 -5000 -ohm linear potentiometer with spst
RI

RS
switch attached
500K
ATTACK
SI-Spst switch (part of R6)
S2-Dpdt push-on/push-oft switch
Misc.-Suitable chassis, battery connector,
pert or printed circuit board, clips, etc.
Fig. 1. Triggered square -wave output of op amp provides good fuzzy sounds.

any type of enclosure. The control switch signals, run a small (200 pF or so) capaci-
(S2) should be a foot -operated device and tor from the (-)
input of ICI to ground.
must be enclosed in a sturdy housing. As When using the adapter with an organ,
shown in the photographs, the author put connect the adapter between the organ and
the entire circuit in a metal box. any volume pedals, or the action may be
unpredictable. The attack control (R5) ,
Operation. Plug the instrument to be while not making too obvious a difference
fuzzed into the input connector, JI, and with stringed instruments, allows considera-
connect the output terminal, 12, to the ble variation of the output sounds when
amplifier being used. Apply power to the used with organs or other types of tone -
fuzz by turning on Si. Turn level control generated instruments.
R6 and attack control R5 about half -way You will have to play the Optimum Fuzz
up. Play the instrument, and operate the for a while to get used to the somewhat
foot switch, S2, to make sure that you get abrupt decay. It is much faster than that
both the straight and the fuzzed signals as of conventional fuzzes (due to the trigger-
the circuit is switched in and out. Should ing action) but with a little practice, this
;

there be any problems with pickup of radio problem is easily overcome. O

Photo of author's prototype shows method of construction. You could

also install the electronics in one chassis and the foot -controlled
switch in another sturdier one with a cable to connect the two units.

1974 Spring Edition

 It's new! It's digital!

Bell eez
Build it
Howell Schools introduces a giant-screen color TV

138 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 Do it for the fun!
What a thrill to spend your spare time
actually building your own color TV!
Especially one with features made
possible by the new technology of digital
electronics!
Like channel numbers that flash
right on the screen! No more squinting to
yoursei see which channel you're on or want
to turn to.
th these amazing features An on-screen digital clock! Just a
push of a button and your TV tells you
Digital clock Channel numbers the time of day in hours, minutes
Automatic pre-set and seconds!
that flashes on screen that flash on the screen channel selector An automatic channel selector that
you pre-set to skip over "dead" channels
and go directly to the channels of your
choice.
. nuazed TV pcmre Plus...all-electronic tuning, reliable
integrated circuitry and a 1001 solid-state
chassis for a bright, sharp picture with
long life and dependability.

Do it for the money!

After you build your TV, cash in on
all the new skills you've learned! This new
Bell & Howell Schools at-home program
gives you up-to-date skills in home
entertainment electronics and digital
circuitry that could lead to extra income,
full or part time. We even include a
complete volume on how to start your own
TV service business!
Do it now!
Find out how you can build and keep
this Bell & Howell 25 -inch diagonal
digital color TV- plus our exclusive
Electro -Lab" electronics training system
with new digital multimeter, solid-state
"triggered sweep" oscilloscope and
design console.
Find out, too, about the Lab Starter
Kit that gives you "hands on" experience
-
with your first lesson and about the toll -
free phone-in assistance and in-person
"help sessions" to assist you every step of
the way. Mail the card now.

Mail the postage-free card

today for full details, free!
If card has been removed write:
AnElectronics Home Study School
DEVRV IOSTITUTE OF TECHfOCOGV

a
ONC IX(

BELLE HOWELL SCHOOLS

4141 Seimonl Cli cago t

"Electro-Lab" regnle,e,1 trudenvul

ts a
ol the 1ìe11 & Howell Company

1974 Spring Edition 141

BUILD A

CRYPTO

ELECTRONIC SECURITY:

SMALL IN SIZE AND BURGLAR PROOF

BY JAMES G. BUSSE

ARE almost as many varieties of By contrast, the "Cryptolock" is a sim-

THERE
electronic combination locks as there are ple device, that is inexpensive, easy to
combinations to operate them. Most are build, and small enough to give you elec-
complex pieces of solid-state wizardry- tronic lock protection on such things as
often employing dozens of costly compo- medicine cabinets, power tool chests, gun
nents in elaborate circuits to provide bur- racks, desks, and even strong boxes. Or you
glar-proof "one -chance -in-1,774,385" com- can use it to safeguard the doors of your
binations.
142 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
home and garage as safely as the best electronic circuit, which is housed in a
mechanical lock. small, molded -plastic box mounted inside
The Cryptolock's three -digit combina- the area to be protected.
tion is deceptive. Numerical grouping, two The combination of the unit shown in
timing circuits and a penalty feature make Fig. 1 is 1/5-4. This means that, to open the
"cracking" it a difficult task. Yet, when one lock, switches 1 and 5 must be pressed
knows the combination, it can be opened in simultaneously, followed immediately by
less than two seconds. The Cryptolock can the pressing of switch 4. Most people find
be powered by batteries or by a low - that it is quite easy to press the two initial
voltage dc power supply. Thus it is suitable switches at the same time with their index
for both fixed and p:ntable installations. and middle fingers. Since these two switches
On the "key" panel for the Cryptolock are wired in series, they must be closed at
are six miniature, momentary -contact, push- the same time for a fraction of a second
button switches-each identified by num- in order to enter the first part of the com-
ber. The switches are connected to the bination. Then when the 4 switch is

-i-
82 83
--II-
Só Q2
HEP250

2 13 16 R2
IK

R3
IOOK

*SEE TEXT K2
Fig. 1. If desired, circuit can be extended by adding more switches in parallel
with S2, S3, and S6; in series with S1 and S5; or in series with S4. To
change combinations, rearrange the switch positions on door or plate.

PARTS LIST
R1,R2-1000-ohm, '-watt resistor
R3-100,000 -ohm, att resistor
RI -9 -volt dc source SCR)-Silicon controlled rectifier (GE -X1 or
C1 -30-µF, 15 -volt electrolytic capacitor similar, see text)
C2 -100-µF, 15-volt electrolytic capacitor S1-S7-Spst normally open miniature push-
K1,K2-5000-ohm miniature dc relay (Lafay- button switch (Switchcraft 961 or similar)
ette Little Jewel 99E60915 or similar) Misc.-Test lamp (6 -to -9 -volt), pert board,
K.3 -6 -to -9 -volt dc solenoid or relay (see text) plastic case, power relay (optional), inter.
0l,Q2-SK3004 or HEP250 transistor connecting multi -lead cable.

1974 Spring Edition 143

 CI

If you build lock on perf board, you can

follow layouts used on the prototype.

pressed, the solenoid on the lock is ener- the unit as small as possible for use in a
gized. limited space. However, a larger enclosure
That seems pretty simple, but there is a can be used. The circuit can be located
catch. After the first two numbers are some distance away from the key panel
pressed, you have only about one and one- and the solenoid latching mechanism.
half seconds to press the third. After that The components were mounted on perf-
time, nothing happens when the third num- board. Parts placement is not critical, as
ber is pressed. It is then necessary to start long as each component is isolated from the
over with the first two numbers. This two - others and free movement of the relay
digit/ one -digit combination is enough to armature is assured. Point-to-point wiring
confuse most would-be "safe-crackers" who is acceptable if leads are kept short and
expect to try no end of one -number -at-a - neat. Use a needle -nose pliers or a clip -type
time combinations. That's not the end of heat sink to protect Q1 and Q2 when sol-
the thief's problems, however. If, at any dering. The SCR is bolted to the perf board
time after he has chanced to press 1 and 5 by its threaded anode. Bolt or cement the
simultaneously, he chances to press 2, 3, or two miniature relays to the perf board.
6, the lock is automatically deactivated for They should be mounted so that they are
about 25 seconds. Until the circuit comes upright and relatively level. Their per-
to life again, even the correct combination formance will be affected if they are mount-
won't open it. What's more, if 2, 3, or 6 is ed on their sides or inverted.
pressed again during this period, the wait-
ing time is extended to the full 25 seconds.
The fact that there is no way to tell when
he has deactivated the circuit by pressing
the wrong number is enough to discourage
even the most persistent burglar.
Of course, the combination of the Crypto-
lock can be changed to any two-digit/one-
digit code in a matter of minutes with a
soldering iron. It can also be made more
complicated by adding four or more switches
in parallel with the penalty switches (2, 3,
and 6). The combination-while sufficient-
ly complex to foil most attempts to open it
illegally-is still simple enough for a child
to remember and use.

Construction. Using the circuit shown in

Fig. 1, the prototype was built in a 234' X To protect relays, in prototype, unit
334' X 'e' molded plastic box. This makes was mounted in a plastic enclosure.

144 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 The components chosen for SCR1, K3
and the power source must be properly re-
lated. Start with the selection of solenoid
K3. There are many low -current do sole-
noids on the market, so select a 6- or 9 -volt
type that is spring -loaded to remain locked
unless the coil is energized. Then choose
an SCR that can carry the coil current and
a power source that can handle this load.
As another option, a 6 -to -9 -volt relay (with
contacts rated to carry the load) can be
used instead of K3 if you wish to activate
some form of alarm. With do applied to the
SCR, once it is fired, it will remain on
unless the supply is interrupted. This is
the purpose of the normally closed push-
button S7. When S7 is depressed, the SCR
is cut off.

Checkout. When all components have

been secured in place and wired in accord-
ance with Fig. 1, substitute a 6 -to-9 -volt
lamp for K3. Depress pushbutton switches
1 and 5 and note that relay KI closes. If it Six pushbuttons can be marked in any
does not, recheck all wiring, including the fashion with numbers, letters, symbols.
connections to the pushbuttons on the key
panel. It's easy to wire them incorrectly
Switch S7 is used to de -activate the sys-
since you are working from behind and
tem.
they are in reverse order. Once assured that
Now press 2, :3, or 6 on the key panel.
the wiring is correct, press 1 and 5 again,
followed quickly by 4. The test lamp should Relay K2 should close and remain closed
light, indicating that SCR has been trig- for 20 to 30 seconds. During this time, it is
gered and the lock is open. If not, use impossible to activate Kl. If K2 doesn't
needle -nose pliers to bend the metal tab close, repeat the adjustment procedure
(carefully) to which the armature spring specified for Kl. Generally speaking, you
won't have to adjust K2 because it closes
of Kl is attached. Bend it upward to de-
with much more force than Kl. There are
crease the tension on the spring. Try the
a number of types of miniature, 5000 -ohm
combination again. An additional adjust-
ment of Kl's spring may be necessary. do relays on the market and their response
times vary considerably so be prepared to
switch relays if necessary. Once Kl and
K2 are adjusted, no further adjustments
should be necessary. just be sure they re-
main in an upright position while the
Cryptolock is being activated.
In the typical home or garage installa-
tion, it's a good idea to provide a key
switch backup to the electronic locking sys-
tem. Simply wire a spst key switch so that
it bypasses the electronic lock and (when
closed with a mechanical key) applies pow-
er directly to the solenoid latch to open the
door. The key switch can he located some
distance from the electronic key panel and
concealed. This will enable you to open
the door in the event the key panel is
damaged as a result of an attempted bur-
In finished version, six pushbuttons glarly. Also remember to keep pushbutton
are mounted on door being protected. S7 within the protected area.
1974 Spring Edition 145
 3-15 VOLT 0.1% REGULATORS
ON A CIRCUIT BOARD
Slowlurn-On
Board contains 3 15 volt reg-

ÿ
>
º -

d
ulators. 2 rated at 3 amps &
1 O6 amps, all e0.1%.At

5 & 10 amps, reg. is 0.5%.

Comes with common +,
easily isolated or changed to
Protects
common -. Ideal for circuits

PowerSupply
- le.
requiring e & 15 volts.Board
R -

.
.,,.- , contains 5 2N5878 150 watt1
silicon NPN transistors. 4
-- used in regulators &
.- spare. 1

2 regulators have electronic crowbar over volt- BY FRANK TOOKER

age control, and all are short circuit protected.
Precision resistors and capacitors used thruout.
Best regulators we've seen, all for less than the O RDINARILY, when a power supply is
price of the power transistors. With data sheet switched on from a cold start, the instan-
and circuit diagram. 6"x6"
STOCK NO.Z5169 11.95 ea. 2/22.00 taneous voltage drop across the filter ca-
pacitor is zero. Hence, at the instant of
HONEYWELL 1 2"x4" COMPUTER BOARD turn -on, the rectifier and power transform-
:. .
er "see" a short circuit. Not until the
_. Loaded with comp-
onents of all kinds.
- -

_-
-

a parts bonanza.
filter capacitor becomes charged does the
power supply operate normally.
STOCK NO.Z9121 3 diff boards 2.00
Although solid-state rectifiers can ab-
9/5.00 20/10.00 sorb a very high momentary current surge
WE HAVE INEXPENSIVE POWER TRANS- without breaking clown, it would be better
FORMERS FOR EVERY PROJECT IN THIS all around if the turn -on could be delayed
MAGAZINE' WRITE FOR CATALOG.
to eliminate the instantaneous surge.
MINIMUM ORDER $5.00. Include sufficient
postage;excess refunded.Send for latest 56 The schematic diagram shows how to add
page catalog with exciting values. the simple delaying network to an existing
power supply circuit. Notice that the de-
DELTA1,NELECTRONICS
MASSACHUSETTS 01
lay network is installed between the recti-
fier and filter capacitor.
CIRCLE NO. 4 ON READER SERVICE CARD
The operation of the network is simple

ór D
and virtually foolproof. Capacitor Cl has
no voltage drop across it when no voltage
is applied to the power supply. So, the
voltage at the base of QI is zero at the

FAST EASY - instant of turn -on. Now, when the power

supply is switched on, Cl begins to charge
up though RI. The rate of charge depends
with DATAK's on the values of Cl and RI; the higher the
values, the slower will be the charging rate.
As the voltage across Cl increases, current
begins to flaw from QI's collector to its
emitter, charging the supply's filter capac-
itor. The rate of charge for the filter follows
EASY-patterns rub down the rate of charge on Cl almost exactly.
directly on the copper A charging rate of from 0.5 to 1.0 second,
board and connect with
rub -down lines or tapes from zero to full charge, has been found
supplied.
FAST-safe new etchants to be more than adequate for most appli-
will etch a 2 oz. copper cations. O
board in 30 minutes. OI
ACCURATE-±.002" print TO POWER SUPPLY 2N3055 POWER
tolerance so parts and FILTER CAPACITOR SUPPLY
RECTIFIER
connectors mate with no
errors. Circuit Made With ER -1
RI
COMPLETE ER -1 SET contains hundreds of dry trans-
fer DIP, flatpack, TO -5, IC, and transistor patterns;
'/,6" and ii:" etch resist tapes; 4 copper clad boards;
lb. dry etch; tray and instructions. $5.95 ppd.
IN STOCK AT ALLIED AND OTHER DISTRIBUTORS
CI
WRITE FOR FREE CATALOG listing this and many T200NF
other dry transfer marking sets.
The DATAK Corporation
65 Seventy-first Street Guttenberg, New Jersey 07093
CIRCLE NO. 2 ON READER SERVICE CARD 146 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
 PREVENT HIGH -VOLTAGE CAPACITOR BREAKDOWN

BY GEORGE J. PLAMONDON

a high -voltage electrolytic capaci- capacitors by restoring the dielectric so that

WHEN
tor has been unused for too long a time, there is no chance of its breaking down
it is customarily looked upon as a possible when put to use.
troublemaker. Too often, when power is ap- However, before finding out how to re-
plied to such units, the dielectric punctures, store an electrolytic, let's be sure we know
destroying the capacitor and probably the the exact nature of the trouble.
associated circuit. Unfortunately, many peo-
ple have some of these capacitors in their What Is an Electrolytic Capacitor? An
junk boxes (they were quite common in electrolytic capacitor usually consists of two
power supplies for vacuum -tube circuits), flexible sheets of aluminum foil separated by
but hesitate to use them. Since they are fair- gauze impregnated with an electrolyte.
ly expensive, it behooves the electronics ex- Leads are connected to each foil section. The
perimenter or service man to salvage such foil connected to the positive lead has an
1974 Spring Edition 147
oxide coating which serves as the capacitor's is in storage, time and ambient heat take
dielectric. It is the thickness of this coating their toll and the oxide deteriorates. When
that determines the working voltage of the the full working voltage is applied to a ca-
capacitor. pacitor whose oxide is weak, the latter breaks
While the capacitor is being used, the ox- down and a short circuit is placed across the
ide coating is preserved by chemical pro- circuit.
cesses resulting from the voltage impressed
across the terminals. Unfortunately, when it Reforming the Dielectric. The dielectric

148 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 J4 J3 J2 JI

Perf board construction may

be used with operating con-
trols and jacks mounted on
front panel of selected cabi-
net. A TV -type cheater con-
nector is used to make the
power connection. Mount
perf board on suitable spac-
ers and be sure that com-
ponents on board do not
make electrical contact with
any front -panel elements.

of a suspect capacitor can be reformed by an occasional look at a dc voltmeter to check

connecting a low do voltage across the capa- progress. The cost of the project is about $14
citor and slowly increasing the voltage until if all parts are bought new.
the rated value is reached. This must be
done over a long period of time to allow the Construction. The prototype shown in the
oxide to reform properly. photos was housed in a conventional plastic
The "Electrolytic Restorer" described here case although any type of arrangement will
does this job automatically, and requires only suffice. The schematic of the circuit is shown
1974 Spring Edition 149
 perforated board. The front panel controls
THEORY OF CIRCUIT DESIGN and jacks are mounted directly on the case
cover, making sure that all leads are long
Diodes DI through D4 and capacitors Cl enough to reach the electronics board. For
through C4 form a full -wave voltage quadrup- safety, a 1:1 ac line isolation transformer
lar rectifier with a dc output of approximately
600 volts. Resistors R7 through R16 form a should be used, though this is not shown in
voltage divider network and S3 selects the de- the prototype.
sired voltage and applies it to the parallel -
connected positive output jacks JI and J2. Operation. The electrolytic capacitor to he
The negative side of the power supply is con-
nected through a switch -selected resistor net- ref -Fined is connected to the output jacks,
work consisting of R4 through R6 to the making sure that the polarities are observed.
parallel -connected negative jacks J3 and J4. The positive side of the capacitor is con-
The use of S2 determines the forming rate. nected to either JI or 12 and the negative
The DISECr position permits the unit to be
used as a high -voltage, low -current power sup- side to either J3 or J4. The do voltmeter for
ply. This position can be eliminated if de- checking the reforming action is connected
sired. to the remaining two jacks. Make sure that
The DISCHARGE position of S3 paces R17 the polarity and voltage range are correct.
across the output to discharge the formed ca-
pacitor. while resistors rv2 a..d /t3 seep a The voltmeter can be disconnected and re-
small load on the power supply and discharge connected at any time without affecting the
the power supply capacitors. operation.
During the forming process, the capacitor's Place S3 in the DISCHARGE position, plug
resistance is low so most of the voltage is
dropped across the limiting resistor. As the the unit in, and turn on the power. Neon in-
oxide coating in the capacitor is re-formed. dicator lamp II should glow. Set the desired
less current flows through the capacitor. caus- forming rate on S2 and then rotate S.3 to the
ing the voltage across it to increase. When working voltage of the capacitor. If the ca-
this voltage equals the preset voltage on S3, pacitor is unformed, the voltmeter will indi-
the reformation is complete.
cate a much lower voltage than that set on
S3.
in Fig. 1. Exact placement of parts is not Note that the voltmeter indication starts to
given since dimensions are not critical and increase quickly at first, then slows down as
the control locations can be changed de- the dielectric forms. The rate of increase is
pending on personal preferences. determined by the condition of the capacitor
Most of the circuit can be assembled on and the setting of S2. When the SLOW setting

Be careful when drilling holes in the plastic front panel as it will chip easily.
Neon indicator lamp is cemented in the hole, other components use hardware.

150 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

Insulated wiring is used to make interconnections. If metal case
is used, make sure spacers keep connections from touching case.

is used, the operation takes longer but the rent power supply, set the forming rate switch
oxide formed will be of better quality. The (S2) to DIRECT. A current of 4 mA may be
opposite is true for the FAST setting. Use the drawn continuously, and somewhat higher
NORMAL position for most cases. currents for a short period of time. (A load
When the voltage across the capacitor is current of 10 mA causes a dissipation of 3
approximately equal to the set on S3, put the watts in the divider resistors.)
switch on DISCHARGE and remove the capaci- The Electrolytic Restorer can also be used
tor. No harm will be done if the capacitor is for a quick go -no-go check of voltmeters.
left connected longer than required, so it is Comparison of voltage switch settings and
not necessary, to check progress constantly. voltmeter readings will reveal any gross in-
To use the unit as a high -voltage, low -cur - accuracies. OO

13
óP
r

top

ElEcTAO`YTiC rITgGE
RESTpRER

0N

The finished front panel should be labeled as

shown here. A coating of transparent plastic
spray keeps lettering from getting smeared.

1974 Spring Edition 151

Build an
u o Level
ADDING MULTI RANGES TO A LOW-COST DB METER

BY SAMUEL C. MILBOURNE

USERS of audio equipment often have a close you can set and read the ac voltage
need to know the level of the audio applied in Fig. 1 and how close you can
signal at various points within a system. come in selecting the final values of the
For this reason, many units come with built- fixed resistor.
in level (dB) meters. If your present system In the prototype, we used the closest
does not have a level meter, or if you need standard 5% resistors, obtaining reasonably
an extra one, here is your chance to con- accurate scale indications. Odd values of
struct one at low cost. resistance can be made by combining two
The actual meter used in the prototype resistors. (For example, to get 51k, use
is a low-cost panel meter having a -10/0/ 47k and 3.9k in series. Of course, parallel-
+6 dB scale, built-in rectifier, and series ing can also be used.) Be careful not to
resistor for the basic range. (The meter overheat resistors when building up pairs
is available from such surplus dealers as as they may change value with heat.
Fair Radio Sales, 1016 E. Eureka St., Lima, The resistor network may be attached
OH 45802, for about $5.) It used 6 mW directly to the switch contacts or mounted
into a 600 -ohm line as 0 dB; but informa- on a piece of perf board. Use a pair of
tion is supplied here for both 500 -ohm and conventional banana jacks for the connec-
1-mW circuits. tors.
When the meter is complete, re -run the
Calibration. The accompanying table voltage steps, changing the switch at each
shows the calibration voltages required to range, to check that the meter indicates at
cause the meter to indicate at the 0 -dB the 0 -dB point at each switch position. If
mark for ranges up to +32 dB.
Determine the highest range to which R2
you will want to calibrate, pick a trans- FI 60011
former having at least the necessary voltage
14
T2 (soon)
MI
output and build the circuit shown in Fig. METER
1. Set the voltage -adjustable transformer for
minimum output and Rl for zero resistance.
Only the 600 ohms of R2 (500 ohms if
your meter requires it) should be in the
circuit. For a 6-mW/600-ohm meter, the
application of 1.90 volts (from T2) should
cause the meter to indicate 0 dB. Raise the
voltage to that required for +4 dB and PARTS LIST
adjust Rl until the meter reads 0 dB. AL F1 -1A fuse and holder
curatelv measure and record the resistance 111-dB meter being tested
R1 -250,000 -ohm potentiometer
of Rl for this setting. R2 -600 -ohm. 2 -watt resistor (see text)
Increase the voltage in the steps shown Sl-Spst slide or toggle switch
in the table, measuring and recording the Tl-Variable autotranslormer
resistance of RI for each step. These values T2-Transformer with 117V primary; see text
for secondary
determine the final resistors that are used Il, .-Accurate ac vtvm, line cord.
in the meter circuit shown in Fig. 2. The Fig. 1. Circuit to determine resistances.
final accuracy of the meter depends on how

152 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 dB METER
CALIBRATION VOLTAGES (5.6K INTERNAL)
.333 MA AT 0d B/
Range 6mW/600 6 mW/500 1 mW/600
ohms ohms ohms ALL 1/4 WATT RESISTORS
(dB) (volts) (volts) (volts)
0 1.90 1.73 0.774
+4 3.01 2.75 1.228 8.6K 30K 85K 221K
+8 4.77 4.35 1.946
+12 7.55 6.90 3.084
+16 12.00 10.93 4.887 3.3K 17K 51K 137 K

+20 19.00 17.32 7.746

+24 30.10 27.50 12.28
+28 47.70 43.50 19.46
0 +2 +6+20
+32 75.50 69.00 30.84 +8 +24 O
4 +28 0--
the meter does not indicate directly on the
0 -dB mark, the value of resistance at that
: +320
RANGE
switch position will have to be adjusted.
Lower the resistance if the meter indicates
in the negative dB region; increase it if
the meter is positive. O
INPUT
The finished level meter can be assembled
in any type of case, plastic or metal, and Fig. 2. Final circuit uses resistors
each switch position should be marked in as close as possible to test values.
some manner. sum of the meter reading and the switch
setting. For example, assume the range
Use. With a signal applied, set the range switch is on +12 dB and the meter indi-
switch until the meter is as close to O dB cates -3 dB. The actual level is then +9
as possible. The actual dB level is then the dB. O

ADD A COMPRESSION AMPLIFIER

TO YOUR ELECTRONIC ORGAN
BY J. E. ROHEN
T HE OUTPUT signal level of an electronic
organ is dependent upon the setting of
the foot-pedal volume control, the number
of stops or voices switched in, and the
number of keys depressed at a given mo-
ment. For a fixed volume setting and a
fixed number of stops on line, the volume
level heard will vary considerably, de-
pending on how many keys are depressed
simultaneously. Although the organist can
compensate for the changes in volume by
using the volume pedal, on a fast change
of stops or a quick switch from solo to
rhythm, the audio change is too fast for
him to react, and a choppy audio burst
results.
It is desirable to have a means for keep- Leveling circuit does not affect vol-
ing the volume level constant when such ume or change the frequency response.
rapid changes are made. To accomplish this,
a compression amplifier like the Organ Lev- entire range of frequencies generated by
eler shown in the schematic can be used. the organ without adding coloring to the
Unlike compressors used for PA applica- voices. It can handle large fluctuations in
tions, the Organ Leveler can respond to the input signal without clipping.
1974 Sparing Edition 153
 Stopping Engine Run -On
DOES YOUR CAR ENGINE KEEP RUNNING AFTER
YOU TURN THE IGNITION OFF?
BY KARL O. AND RICHARD K. JOHNSSON

ONE cause of run-on, or what is some- When the engine starts, the alternator
times called "dieseling," in many mod- produces enough power to energize the field
ern cars may be the feeding of electrical relay in the voltage regulator .to apply
power from the voltage regulator to the battery voltage directly to the field coil.
ignition coil after the ignition switch is With 12 volts on both sides of the lamp, it
turned off. goes out, indicating that the alternator is
A portion of the charging circuit for many operating.
recent General Motors cars is shown in the When the ignition switch is turned off,
diagram. When the ignition switch is turned inertia keeps the engine turning over for a
on, 12 volts from the battery is applied to couple of revolutions so that the alternator
the ignition coil as well as to the alternator is still generating enough power to keep the
field through the alternator lamp (mounted field relay close). Now, current (conven-
on the dashboard) and a resistor located in tional ) can flow from the battery through
the voltage regulator housing. This energizes the closed field relay contacts and through
the alternator field winding just enough for the alternator lamp to the ignition coil. This
the alternator to start generating power current is limited by the resistance of the
when the engine runs. This initial flow of lamp (about 34 ampere), and while it is not
current also turns on the alternator lamp to enough to produce a good spark from the
provide a check on the lamp's condition and coil, it may be sufficient to cause the engine
to indicate that the alternator is not produc- to run roughly for some time after the igni-
ing power. tion switch is off. With a transistor type of
ignition system, this small current may be
Addition of silicon diode to basic
enough to keep the engine running for a
circuit (GM shown here) prevents the
engine from running when key is off. considerable time.
One indication of this type of power feed -
JUNCTION
BLOCK through is that the alternator lamp glows
BATT IL_g J during the run-on. A simple way to deter-
IGN. SWITCH
r-
mine if this is your problem is to remove
cc
the lamp from its socket. If the engine stops
normally, with no run-on, then the cure is
DI
simple.
ALT
¡ LAMP Locate the wire from the alternator lamp
IGN to the ignition switch and connect a 3-am-
.J pere, 50 -PIS' silicon rectifier diode (HEP-
161 or similar) as shown in the diagram. Of
TO IGN COIL course, you can connect the diode on the
ALTERNATOR, REGULATOR (PART AL)
other side of the lamp if that lead is easier
r I

to get to.
rT Since you want current (conventional) to
flow from the ignition switch to the regu-
IC> lator, but not backwards, the cathode end
of the diode should be toward the voltage
regulator. After cutting the correct wire,
solder the diode in series and tape all ex-

lamp.
R
posed leads. This installation does not affect
F 2 31 4 the normal operation of the ignition system,
or the alternator
154 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK
Make a
Squawk Box Toy for $3
IT WILL ENTERTAIN AND EDUCATE YOUR CHILDREN

BY BENNETT A. LOFTSGAARD

are the best aids for keeping Insert a battery into the battery holder
TOYSchildren occupied and out from under and close the cigar box, using a length of
foot. The Squawk Box circuit shown in the transparent or masking tape to keep the
diagram, when assembled, will emit squeal- lid down. To test the Squawk Box, simply
ing, squawking, and other strange sounds place one hand on each of the foil panels.
which should keep any child of eight years In so doing, your body should complete
old and less absorbed for hours. It even the circuit and you should hear a "squawk-
has a built-in secret which the small fry ing" sound.
will soon discover.
The pars needed for the Squawk Box
are readily available. They include a cigar :11.5V I CODE
PM¡1
box, aluminum foil, a battery with holder, BATTERY PRACTICE
SPKR
a code practice oscillator kit (available
T OSCILLATOR j\`
from most electronics outlets) , and a small I

PM speaker. The whole thing should not

cost you more than about $3.
FOIL PANELS
The first thing to do is cut a piece of
aluminum foil to a size so that it covers Parts necessary for the Squawk Box
the entire cigar box lid and overlaps the are a cigar box, aluminum foil, bat-
front and both sides by about 1;2". Rubber tery with holder, code practice kit,
cement the foil to the lid, neatly tucking and small permanent magnet speaker.
the foil around the edges of the lid and To assemble the Squawk Box, use the
cementing it to the lid's inside surface. diagram that is provided with the CPO
kit. The aluminum foil panels are
Use a sharp knife to remove a 34" -wide strip
substitutes for feedback capacitor.
of the foil down the center of the lid,
ending up with two electrically insulated
foil panels. Insert a straight pin on a slant Now, give the Squawk Box to the kids
through each foil panel on the inside of and let them figure out how it works.
the box lid. Solder an 8" length of hookup In a little while, they will learn that several
wire to each pin. of their friends can foam a hand -holding
Using the circuit diagram which ac- chain to make it work. They will also find
companies the code practice oscillator, that the better the contact,, the lower the
locate and remove the feedback capacitor. tone. As a result, the toy tends to respond
Then wire the speaker and battery holder to the emotions of the person or persons
to the appropriate wires on the oscillator playing with it.
and the two wires coming from the straight The secret? Some ingenious child is
pins to the points from which the feedback sooner or later going to touch one panel
capacitor was removed. Mount the CPO, with his hand and the other panel to a
battery holder, and speaker to the floor good earth ground (such as a water pine) ,

of the cigar box. (Note: Before mounting and-lo and behold-he is going to hear
the speaker, punch or drill a few holes music or announcements. He will find that
through the bottom of the box so that the his Squawk Box is also an AM receiver ca-
sound can get out.) pable of picking up nearby signals. OO

1974 Spring Edition 155

 UNUSUAL TO FIND BARGAINS ELECTRONIC
NEW PRODUCTS NEW MATERIALS NEW METHODS
KNOW YOUR ALPHA FROM THETA! EXPERIMENTER'S
greater relaxation, concentra -
,e
listen to your Al ,

brainwaves. Ultra -sensitive elee.

de headband slips on ,fl' in HANDBOOK
ds-eliminates need for
messy creams, etc. Alch'ti to x
i,litier, filters bralnwavcs. siq-
uals beep for ea. Alpha or Theta
wave passed. Monitoring button
simulates Alpha sod: audio &
tat IL.F..D.I feedback. Relia-
SPRING 1974
ble. easy -to -use unit -comparable
Io costlier models. Completely
sate. Comprehensive Instruction
!'ooklet.
$128.00 Pod. READER
No. 1635GD (843x4"; 24 oz.)
LOW COST 'STARTER" UNIT NO. 71.809G19$49.95 Ppd. SERVICE NO. ADVERTISER PAGE NO.

130 EXPERIMENTS IN OPTICS . . . Bell & Howell Schools 18, 19, 20, 21, 138,
n.1 ehIpgraphy: OplixeEoperi-
Kit is a complete optical
photography lab for 1:10 txcit-
ant-s 139, 140, 141
eccate
tg he periscope tstelesscooupe.
microscope. kaleidoscope! Hu I 3 Cleveland Institute of Electronics 155, 156, 3rd Cover
a35mm reflexlens camera with In-
terchangeable system! Make,
develop photographic film! Enjoy 1 Continental Specialties Corporation 2nd Cover
the fun and fascination of having
own
112-pR manu al. 8,6xl lFully learly 2 Datak Corporation 146
usage of this stimulat-
ng kit's 114 precision engi-
iexplains
4 Delta Electronics Co. 146
Stock Not 71.646GD $22.50 Ppd.
AERONAUTICS FUN KIT (100 Experiments)
Stock No. 71.840GD $15.95 Ppd. 8 Edmund Scientific Corp. 156
3 -CHANNEL COLOR ORGAN KIT 9 GTE Sylvania 69, 70, 71
......... Easy to build low-cost kit needs
no technical knowledge. Com-
pleted unit has 3 hands of audio 5 Heath Company 87, 88, 89
frequencies to modulate 3 Inde -
pendent strings of colored l
i.e. lows"-reds."middles".
1

"highs"-blues). Just co 11 Meshna Jr., John 83

eel hi-fi. radio, power amp etc.
x plug ea. lamp string into own NRI Training 1, 2, 3
,hnnnel irmoc. 300w e Kit fea- ,

tures 3 neon indicators, color

intensity controls. controlled 10 RCA Electronics Components and Devices ...4th Cover
ndivid SCR circuits. ikolation
transformer; custom plastic houa-
dnstr.

hly.
Stock No. 41.831GD $17.50 Pod. 12 Schober Organ Corp., The 6

SPECIAL VISUAL EFFECTS PROJECTOR SET 13 Techni-Tool, Inc. 6

na«ing. avaoLe.garale , n,l ef-
fects. Fantastic iety.ism'ed-
beautiful. Special package
offer contains all necessary appa-
ratus. Create floating sexploding.
fiery bursts of color like "Sym-
phony of Spheres". "Chromatic
Starbursts". "(7rystal Starburst".
Features 35mm 5011W. fan cooled
melector-produces big image at ANSWERS TO CAPACITOR QUIZ
short distance. Spectacular 3 di- (Appearing on page 90)
rectional kaleidoscope lens, two
os diam. wheels tEaleìdoscnpe &
Ifexidoscopel, 2 cylindrical
Dries ,H^ Colored Cloud &a' 1. High end
uexidaeon, , internal i, ed`;:alls/. Isstr.
Increase
Stock No. 71,295GD ..........................$
DELUXE PROJECTOR W KALEIDOSCOPIC LENS
REMOTE CONTROL PROFESSIONAL MODEL
99.50 Ped.
2.
3. Padder
Stock No. 71.868GD $119.95 Ppd
4. Neutralizing
ACTUAL WORKING SOLAR HOME PLANS 5. Decoupling
Learn all about the most fasci-
nating possible honte of the fil.
titre. It ca be yournr
6. 0.1 p,F, ±3 percent, 1200 volts
to today's rgY crisist in
housing. Expert Dr. Hamy E.
7. 720 pF, ±5 percent, -150 PPM/'C
l'homason tells advantages. prob- 8. 12 pF
lems, savings. and more in this
-filled book- 9. 6 pF
imp eta tn20-pgs act
let. oversize
insert of basic, actual solar home 10. 10 pF
ians. valuable ,n ,inert-,, to
your und yourarchitect in -fitting
design ideas,
not loig,l I.0 n,nts. . vede.s.
No. 9440GD ,Solar House Plans) $10.00 Pod.

MAIL COUPON FOR AC CIRCUIT THEORY QUIZ

GIANT FREE CATALOG! (Appearing on page 98)

180 PAGES MORE THAN 1. (10)2 = (8)2 + (VR)2; VR = 6 V

2. (20)2 = (7 + VC)2 + (12)2; VC 9V
4500 UNUSUAL BARGAINS!
items, cate-
Competely n av 1974 edition. New
gories.illustrations. 1811 easy -to -read pages
packed with 4000 unusual items. Dozens of
3. (24)2 = (VL
4. (15)2 = (350
--6)2; VL = 30 V
350)2 + (VR)2; VR = 15 V
electrical and electromagnetic parts. aecec-
fes. Enormous selections of Astronomical
Magoi-
5. (VT)2= (15-3)2-I-(16)2;VT- 20V
Telescopes. Microscopes, Pima/Wars.
fiery, Magnets. Lenses, hob iss.
war urplussage items: for hobbyists.
s,
Many
Man-
.

.
6. (50)2 = (VL)2 + (12)2 = (VC)2 -f- (12)2;
menters, workshops, factory. Write for rata- VL VC
ur ^cn.
EDMUND SCIENTIFIC CO., Barrington, N.J. 08007
(VT)2 = (VL -
VC)2 + (12)2; VT = 12 V
(IT)2 = (6)2 + (8)2; IT = 10 mA
I
7.
NAME
ADDRESS 8. (20)2 = (16 -
IC)2 + (16)2; IC = 4 mA or
28 mA
CITY STATE ZIP
9. (IT)2 = (17 -- -
13)2 + (3)2; IT = 5 mA
EDMUND
SCIENTIFIC CO.
300 EDBCORP
NEW
BARRINGTON.
BLDG. 10. (9)2 = (20
25 mA
4 IC)2; IC = 7 mA or
01011 an SUPCC ;MOM
OMM IIND C CS OS NONA 01051 11110NA-SAC OMASANIII

CIRCLE NO. 8 ON READER SERVICE CARD

156 ELECTRONIC EXPERIMENTER'S HANDBOOK

 You earn to
Make Money
...with CIE's
Electronics
Laboratory!
Now you can learn Electronics by performing

more than 200 practical, skill -producing

experiments ...with authentic industrial

components... at home ...in your spare time.
You learn by doing! This 16/piece Laboratory includes
-
the up-to-date equipment you'll need such things as an
IC (integrated circuit), printed circuit board, FET (field
You learn how to construct
circuits and connect them with
Testing and troubleshooting
are an important part of your
effect transistor), photovoltaic cell, DC motor, micro- a soldering iron, which is part of learning experience. Your labora-
your CIE laboratory equipment. tory has a precision multimeter
phone, multimeter, soldering iron and power supply. This "hands on" experience is to diagnose electronic troubles
You put theory into practice right in your own home... extremely valuable. quickly and accurately.
in your spare time...while you go right on pulling down
your present pay. It's CIE's exciting space-age "Elec- APPROVED UNDER G.I. BILL
tronics Technology with Laboratory" program... All CIE career courses are approved for educational
a unique combination of CIE's special AUTO - benefits under the G.I. Bill. If you are a Veteran or
PROGRAMMED® Lessons and laboratory equipment.
It is the practical way to learn Electronics! ff ffffff ffff f
in service now, check box for G.I. Bill information.
ffl MIr. IMI IIMP .
Cleveland Institute
Prepare for a High -paying Career
You see, when you "learn by doing'; you're ready to do
...you're armed with the know-how to meet the chal-
C IE of Electronics, Inc.
177E East 17th Street, Cleveland, Ohio 44114
lenges of a high -paying career in Electronics... Accredited Member National Home Study Council
prepared togo after an exciting, relevant job in a growing
field such as medical technology, pollution control, radio Please send me your 2 FREE
and TV broadcasting, computers...just to name a few. BOOKS-The CIE school cata-
Once you have some experience, you can make $12,000 log,"Succeed in Electronics"
a year or more. and "How To Get a Commercial
But that's not all! When you successfully complete FCC License:'
your Electronics Laboratory course, you'll get a CIE
Diploma. And, you'll be able to pass the Government
FCC examination or be entitled to a full refund of all Name
IPiease Ponrt
tuition paid! CIE's Money -Back Warranty is valid during
Address
the completion time allowed for your course.
Send today for CIE's 2 FREE BOOKS about oppor- City
tunities in Electronics. For your convenience, we will
State Zip Age
try to have a representative call. Mail reply card or
coupon to CIE...or write: Cleveland Institute of Veterans and Servicemen:
Check here for G.I. Bill information. -1`
Electronics, Inc., 1776 E. 17th St., Cleveland, Ohio 44114. EH

CIRCLE NO. 3 ON READER SERVICE CARD

Get the whole kit and Now available from RCA
.. a wide variety of solid-
state components in conven-

caboodle from RCA. ient kit form to build inter-

esting and useful projects.
And you can further ex-
pand your solid-state experi-
RCA IC Project Kits, Experimenter Kits, and Devices
ence with RCA's popular
Type Description Type Description hobby and experimenter's
manuals. For example, the
KC4000 Microphone Pre -Amplifier Kit KD2100 Silicon Control Rectifier Assembly
KC4001
.C.
.C.Two -Channel Mixer Kit KD2105 SCR Experimenter Kit
368 -page RCA Solid -State
KC4002 .C.Audio Oscillator Kit KD2106 Add on Light Sensor Kit Hobby Circuits Manual (HM -
KC4003 C. Power Amplifier and Oscillator Kit KD2110 Add on Heat Sensor Kit 91) has over 60 interesting
KC4004 C. Regulated Power Supply Kit KD2117 I.C. Experimenter Package
KC4005 C. Intruder Alarm Kit Basic Kit Contains: 2-K02114;
circuits you can build.
KC4006 .C. Fire Alarm Kit 1-KD2115, 2-KD2116 See your RCA Distributor
KC4007A .C. Converter Kit: 118-136MHz
Aircraft Band
KD2118 NPN Silicon Variety Pack (5 Units)
PNP Silicon Variety Pack (5 Units)
to buy the RCA Kits and -
KD2120
KC4008A Converter Kit: 134-150MHz
.C. KD2123 PNP Germanium Variety Pack Manuals of your choice.
Ham, Government, Space Research (5 Units)
KD2124 NPN Germarcum Variety Pack
KC4009A
Band
I.C. Converter Kit: 148-164MHz (5 Units)
RCA I Solid State
Maritime Mobile, Police,Fire Band KD2131 70 -Watt IC Power Module Somerville, N.J. 08876
KC4010A I.C. Converter Kit: 160-174MHz 3N128DP MOS/FET Device in Display
Police, Fire Band (Blister) Pack
KC4011 Digital/Readout IC Kit 40214DP 18 Amp. 'h in. Stud Silicon
KC4012 Digital/Counter IC Kit Rectifier Device in Display
KC4014 Liquid Crystal Clock Kit (Blister) Pack
KC4500 Kit Enclosure for use with KC4000,
KC4001, KC4002, includes Input
& Output Jacks, On -Off Switch and Solid
Hardware
State
CIRCLE NO. 10 ON READER SERVICE CARD